Dell E525w Color Multifunction Printer User's Guide User Manual To The 9b3796f0 7c62 41d3 Bd1a 480178a8555a

User Manual: Dell E525w to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 314 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Dell Color Multifunction Printer | E525w
Contents
Before Beginning
Printer Setup
Using Your Printer
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing
Know Your Printer
Maintaining Your Printer
- Maintaining Your Printer
- Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
- Troubleshooting
Appendix
- Appendix

Dell Color Multifunction Printer | E525w

User's Guide

Regulatory Model: Dell E525w

Contents

Before Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

A Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1 Dell™ Color Multifunction Printer | E525w User's Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conventions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Finding Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Product Features

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 About the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front View

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear View

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Space Requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ordering Supplies

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

5 Connecting Your Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USB Connection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ethernet Connection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

Wireless Connection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting the Telephone Line

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turning on the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Setting Up Your Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Setup Using the Software and Documentation Disc

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 Setting the IP Address

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assigning an IP Address

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tool Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verifying the IP Address

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Settings Report

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ping Command

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Loading Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Firewall Settings Before Installing Your Printer

. . . . . . . . .

USB Connection Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing PCL, PS and Fax Printer Drivers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) Printer Driver

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Connection Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing PCL, PS and Fax Printer Drivers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) Printer Driver

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding Roles of Print Services

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Web Services on Devices (WSD) Printer Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up for Shared Printing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

Enabling Shared Printing From the Computer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the Shared Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Drivers and Software

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Your Computer to the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When Using a USB Connection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When Using Bonjour

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When Using IP Printing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

. . .

Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1 Desktop

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Printer Driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Default Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying the Printing Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Printer Driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Default Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying the Printing Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator

. . . . . . . .

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Printer Driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Default Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying the Printing Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

Using Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

12 Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Operator Panel Buttons

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keypad Letters and Numbers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing Numbers or Names

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inserting a Pause

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing a Panel Settings Page

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Language

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tool Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up From Web Browser

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up From Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the Menu Items

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page Display Format

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Top Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Left Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Right Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Details of the Menu Items

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Status

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Jobs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Server Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Volume

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

Address Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

Tray Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

116

Contents

14 Understanding the Printer Menus

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

117

Defaults Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

117

Copy Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

117

Scan Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

Fax Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124

Print from USB Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126

Tray Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126

MPF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

127

Report/List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

System Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Panel Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

PCL Fonts List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

PS Fonts List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Job History

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Error History

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Color Test Page

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Protocol Monitor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Address Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Fax Activity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Stored Documents List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Admin Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Phone Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

PCL Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

130

PS Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

135

PDF Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

136

Network

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

137

Fax Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

142

System Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149

Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153

Secure Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

157

Scan to E-mail

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159

USB Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159

Panel Language

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160

Panel Lock Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160

Enabling the Panel Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160

Disabling the Panel Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161

Resetting Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161

Contents

15 Print Media Guidelines

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

162

Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

162

Other Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

307

Contacting Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

307

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

B Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Dell Technical Support Policy

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

Online Services

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

Warranty and Return Policy

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310

Recycling Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310

Contacting Dell

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310

New Zealand PTC200 Warnings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

General Warning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

2.11.1 Compliance Testing (6) & (7) (Functional Tests)

. . . . . . . . . . . .

311

4.5.1 Off-hook Line Impedance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

4.9.3 Non-voice Equipment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

5.6.1 General Requirements (Automatic Dialling Devices)

. . . . . . . . . .

311

5.5.5 User Instructions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

8.1.7 User Instructions (Automatic Call Set-up)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

8.2.1(b) Call Answering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

USA/Canada Wi-Fi Warnings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312

Labeling Requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312

RF Exposure Warning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312

Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312

Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

Canada, avis d'Industry Canada (IC)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

Informations concernant l'exposition aux fréquences radio (RF)

. . . . . .

313

Canada IC Statement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

Before Beginning

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings ..................................................... 17

1 Dell™ Color Multifunction Printer | E525w User's Guide ..... 18

2 Finding Information..................................................................... 19

3 Product Features......................................................................... 20

4 About the Printer......................................................................... 22

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

NOTE:

A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.

CAUTION:

A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.

WARNING:

A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.

Trademarks used in this text:

Dell

and the

DELL

logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.;

Microsoft

Windows

Windows Server

Windows Vista

, and

Internet Explorer

are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries;

Apple

Bonjour

iPad

iPhone

iPod touch

Macintosh

Mac OS

, and

TrueType

are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

AirPrint

and the

AirPrint

logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.;

Android

Google Chrome

Gmail

Google

Google Cloud Print

Google Drive

, and

Google Play

are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.;

Adobe, PostScript

and

Photoshop

are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries;

Wi-Fi

and

Wi-Fi Direct

are registered trademark of the

Wi-Fi Alliance;

Wi-Fi Protected Setup

WPA

, and

WPA2

are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance;

Red Hat

and

Red Hat Enterprise Linux

are

registered trademarks of Red Hat. Inc. in the U.S. and other countries;

SUSE

is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc., in the United States and

other countries;

Thinxtream

is a trademark of Thinxtream Technologies Pte. Ltd.;

QR Code

is a registered trademark of Denso Wave

Incorporated;

PCL

is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

XML Paper Specification (XPS)

: This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions

upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.

Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.

Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.

____________________

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS

This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to

restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in

applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.

May 2015 Rev. A00

Dell™ Color Multifunction Printer | E525w User's Guide

Dell™ Color Multifunction Printer | E525w User's

Guide

Click the links to the left for information on the features and operation of your Dell Color Multifunction Printer |

E525w. For information on other documentation included with your Dell Color Multifunction Printer | E525w, see

"Finding Information" on page 19.

NOTE:

In this manual, Dell Color Multifunction Printer | E525w is referred to as the "printer."

Conventions

The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual:

Bold texts :

• Names of hardware button on the operator panel.

• Screen names on the LCD panel.

• Menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen.

Texts in

Courier New

font : • Menus and messages displayed on the LCD panel.

• Characters entered from the computer.

•Directory paths.

: • Key on the keyboard of the computer.



: • Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.

" "

: • Cross references in this manual.

• Characters entered from the operator panel.

• Messages displayed on the computer screen.

Finding Information

What are you looking for? Find it here

• Drivers for my printer

•My

User's Guide

Software and Documentation

disc

The

Software and Documentation

disc contains setup video, documentation,

and drivers for your printer. You can use the disc to install/re-install drivers or

access your setup video and documentation.

Readme files may be included on your disc to provide last-minute updates about

technical changes to your printer or advanced technical reference material for

experienced users or technicians.

• How to use my printer

• How to set up my printer

Setup Guide

• Safety information

• Warranty information

Important Information

WARNING:

Read and follow all safety instructions in the Important Information

prior to setting up and operating your printer.

• Troubleshooting "Troubleshooting" on page 289

• Express Service Code and Service Tag

The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the side door of your

printer.

• Latest drivers for my printer

• Answers to technical service and support

questions

• Documentation for my printer

Go to www.dell.com/support

www.dell.com/support provides several online tools, including:

• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and

online courses

• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as printer driver

• Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair

information

•Downloads — Drivers

• Manuals — Printer documentation and product specifications

Go to www.dell.com/support. Select your region and fill in the requested details

to access help tools and information.

Service Tag

xxxxxxx

Express Service Code

000 000 000 00

Product Features

Scanning to USB Memory (Scan to USB Memory)

Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to save the scanned

documents directly to the USB memory that is connected to

the printer's USB port.

For more information, see "Scanning to USB Memory" on

page 215.

Printing Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet of Paper (Multiple-Up)

Multiple-Up feature allows you to print multiple pages on a

single sheet of paper. Using this feature, you may reduce the

paper consumption.

For more information, see "Multiple-Up" on page 196.

2-Sided Printing (Manual Duplex Print)

Manual Duplex Print feature allows you to print two or more

pages on the front and back side of a single sheet of paper

manually. Using this feature, you may reduce the paper

consumption.

For more information, see "Loading Print Media When Manual

Duplex Printing" on page 174.

Printing From USB Memory (USB Direct Print)

USB Direct Print feature allows you to print directly from your

USB memory without the need to turn on your computer and

printing using an application program.

For more information, see "Direct Print Using the USB Memory

(USB Direct Print)" on page 180.

Wireless Connection

Wireless Connection feature allows you to install the printer at

any location, and enables printing and other services without a

wired connection to your computer.

For more information about wireless connection settings, see

"Wireless Connection" on page 30.

ID Card Copy

ID Card Copy feature allows you to copy both sides of an ID

card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size.

For more information, see "Copying an ID Card" on page 199.

Product Features

Dell Document Hub

Easily access and share

documents, images and digital

content with the Dell

Document Hub App. This

innovative cloud collaboration

solution connects your printer

and devices to popular cloud

services, providing a flexible and

secure way to collaborate from

virtually anywhere. Using your

computer or mobile device, you

can search file across multiple

cloud services simultaneously to

print documents or you can scan

documents directly to the cloud

using the app. For downloading the app, please visit Microsoft

Windows Store, Google

Play Store and Apple

App Store.

For more information about using Dell Document Hub, see the

FAQs in Dell.com/documenthub.

Dell Printer Hub

Dell Printer Hub is the program that monitors and informs you

of the printer’s status and allows you to customize the printer

settings. In addition to the same features as Dell Document

Hub, Dell Printer Hub notifies you of the firmware/software

updates. When you install the drivers for this printer, this

program is also automatically installed.

For more information, open the program and click on the

top right of the main window to see the FAQs.

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Image (Scan to E-mail)

Scan to E-mail feature allows you to send scanned data by

attaching to e-mail. You can choose destination e-mail

addresses from the Address Book on the printer or server. Also,

you can enter the address directly using the numeric keypad on

the operator panel.

For more information, see "Sending an E-mail With the

Scanned Image" on page 216.

Making Copies From the Document Glass

You can scan the pages of a book or a brochure from the

document glass. When you scan documents using the

document glass, place them face down.

For more information, see "Making Copies From the

Document Glass" on page 189.

Making Copies From the ADF

You can scan sheets of unbound paper simultaneously from the

automatic document feeder (ADF). When you scan

documents using the ADF, load them face up.

For more information, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on

page 191.

About the Printer

Front View

1Operator Panel 2Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

3Document Feeder Tray 4Document Output Tray

5Toner Access Cover 6Print Head Cleaning Rod

7Power Switch 8Standard 150 Sheet Tray

9Front USB Port

65234

About the Printer

Rear View

1ADF Cover 2Ethernet Port

3USB Port 4Wall Jack Con nector

5Phone Connector 6Power Connector

7Rear Cover 8Transfer Roller

9Paper Chute 10 Paper Feed Roller

11 Tra nsfe r Be lt 12 Levers

13 Security Slot

12 1

About the Printer

Space Requirements

Place the printer at a location that has adequate space to access the printer tray and covers.

611 mm/24.05 inches

262.5 mm/10.33 inches

398 mm/15.67 inches

670 mm/26.38 inches

338 mm/13.30 inches

410 mm/16.14 inches

132 mm/5.20 inches

100 mm/3.94 inches

About the Printer

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Operator Panel

For more information on the operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on page 70.

1ADF Cover

2Document Guides

3Document Glass

4Document Feeder Tray

123

About the Printer

Securing the Printer

To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.

Connect the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.

For details, see the documentation that shipped with the Kensington lock.

Ordering Supplies

You can order consumables from Dell online when using a networked printer. Enter the IP address of your printer in

your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to order toner

for your printer.

Security slot

Printer Setup

5 Connecting Your Printer............................................................. 28

6 Setting Up Your Printer............................................................... 38

7 Setting the IP Address ............................................................... 43

8 Loading Paper.............................................................................. 46

9 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

........................................................................................................ 49

10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

........................................................................................................ 60

11 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS).......... 62

Connecting Your Printer

Your Dell™ Color Multifunction Printer | E525w interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:

Connection type Connection specifications

Wireless IEEE 802.11b/g/n

USB USB 2.0 compatible

Ethernet 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX compatible

Wall jac k conn ector RJ11

Phone connector RJ11

1Ethernet Port

2USB Port

3Wall Jack C on nec tor

4Phone Connector

Connecting Your Printer

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network

USB Connection

To connect the printer to a computer:

Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other connected devices are turned off and unplugged from the power

source/outlet.

Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the printer.

Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of your computer.

CAUTION:

Do not connect the printer USB cable to a USB port on the keyboard.

Ethernet Connection

To connect the printer to a network:

Ensure that the printer, computer and any other connected devices are turned off and unplugged from the power

source/outlet.

Connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port at the rear of the printer, and the other end to a LAN

drop or hub.

To setup a wireless connection, see "Wireless Connection" on page 30.

USB port

Ethernet port

Connecting Your Printer

NOTE:

Connect the Ethernet cable only when you need to setup a wired connection.

Wireless Connection

Following are the specifications for a wireless setup:

You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following:

NOTE:

Connecting to the network via Ethernet cable disables wireless setting.

Item Specification

Connectivity Wireless

Connectivity standard IEEE 802.11b/g/n compliant

Bandwidth 2.4 GHz

Data transfer rate IEEE 802.11b mode: 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps

IEEE 802.11g mode: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps

IEEE 802.11n mode: 65 Mbps

Security 64 (40-bit key)/128 (104-bit key) WEP, WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES)(IEEE 802.1x

attestation function of WPA 1x non-corresponds), Mixed Mode PSK

Wi-Fi Protected Setup

(WPS)

Push Button Configuration (PBC), Personal Identification Number (PIN)

WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed Mode PSK, WPA-PSK AES, WPA2-PSK

AES, Open (No Security)

WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi | WPS Button)

WPS-PBC (Operator Panel Menu)

WPS-PIN

Auto SSID Setup

Manual SSID Setup

WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless

configuration, by starting WPS-PBC on the printer with the (Wi-Fi | WPS) button or operator panel menu, and then pressing the

button provided on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router. This setting is available only when the access point supports

WPS-PBC.

WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wire-

less configuration, by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available

only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.

Connecting Your Printer

WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi | WPS Button)

You can start WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) by pressing the (Wi-Fi | WPS)

button.

NOTE:

WPS-PBC is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PBC.

NOTE:

Before starting WPS-PBC with the

(Wi-Fi | WPS) button, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may

vary) on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access

point (Registrar) or router, refer to the manual supplied with the product.

NOTE:

For more information on the (Wi-Fi | WPS) button, see

"Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight" on page 72.

If a problem occurs or error messages are displayed on the operator panel, see "Wireless Problems" on page 306.

Press and hold the

(Wi-Fi | WPS)

button on the operator panel until the LCD panel shows

Press WPS

Button on WPS Router

Start the WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router within 2 minutes.

When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed, the

(Wi-Fi | WPS)

button lights up.

WPS-PBC (Operator Panel Menu)

You can start WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) from the operator panel.

NOTE:

WPS-PBC is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PBC.

NOTE:

Before starting WPS-PBC, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may vary) on the wireless LAN access

point (Registrar) or router. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router, refer to

the manual supplied with the product.

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

WPS Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Push Button Configuration

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Yes

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Press WPS Button on WPS Router

is displayed, and start the WPS operation on the wireless

LAN access point (Registrar) or router within 2 minutes.

When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed, the

(Wi-Fi | WPS)

button lights up.

Connecting Your Printer

WPS-PIN

The PIN code of WPS-PIN can only be configured from the operator panel.

NOTE:

WPS-PIN is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PIN.

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

WPS Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

PIN Code

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Write down the displayed 8-digit PIN code or select

Print PIN Code

to print the PIN code.

Ensure that

Start Configuration

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

WPS AP Searching

is displayed, and enter the PIN code you checked in step 7 into the wireless

LAN access point (Registrar) or router.

NOTE:

For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router, refer to the manual supplied with the

product.

When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed, the

(Wi-Fi | WPS)

button lights up.

Auto SSID Setup

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Wireless Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The printer automatically searches the access points on wireless network.

Press the button until the desired access point is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

If the desired access point does not appear, go to "Manual SSID Setup" on page 33.

NOTE:

Some hidden SSID may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected turn on SSID broadcast from the router.

Enter the passphrase or WEP key.

When the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA, WPA2 or Mixed in step 6:

• Enter the passphrase, and then press the

(Set)

button.

When the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 6:

• Enter the WEP key, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

A passphrase is an encryption key for WPA and WPA2 encryption which consists of 8 to 63 bytes ASCII or 8 to 64

bytes Hex. It may be described as a key on some access points or routers. For details, refer to the manual supplied with the

access point or router.

When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed, the

(Wi-Fi | WPS)

button lights up.

Connecting Your Printer

Manual SSID Setup

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Wireless Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Manual Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the SSID, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select the network mode from

Infrastructure

Ad-hoc

depending on your environment, and then press

the

(Set)

button.

If you select

Infrastructure

, proceed to step 9.

If you select

Ad-hoc

, proceed to step 10.

Select the encryption type from

No Security, Mixed Mode PSK

WPA2-PSK-AES

, or

WEP

If you do not set security for your wireless network:

• Press the button until

No Security

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To use Mixed Mode PSK or WPA2-PSK-AES encryption:

Press the button until

Mixed Mode PSK

WPA2-PSK-AES

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the passphrase, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

A passphrase is an encryption key for WPA and WPA2 encryption which consists of 8 to 63 bytes ASCII or 8 to 64

bytes Hex. It may be described as a key on some access points or routers. For details, refer to the manual supplied with the

access point or router.

To use WEP encryption:

Press the button until

WEP

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the WEP key, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to highlight the desired transmit key from

WEP Key 1

WEP Key 4

, and then press

the

(Set)

button.

Proceed to step 11.

Select the encryption type from

No Security

WEP

If you do not set security for your wireless network:

•Ensure that

No Security

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To use WEP encryption:

Press the button until

WEP

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the WEP key, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to highlight the desired transmit key from

WEP Key 1

WEP Key 4

, and then press

the

(Set)

button.

When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed, the

(Wi-Fi | WPS)

button lights up.

Connecting Your Printer

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting

To change the wireless setting through an Ethernet or wireless connection from your computer, perform the

following.

NOTE:

To change the wireless setting through wireless connection, ensure that the wireless connection setting is completed in

"Wireless Connection" on page 30.

NOTE:

The following settings are available when the network mode is set to infrastructure in "Wireless Connection" on page 30.

Check the IP address of the printer.

For details about how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Address" on page 45.

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Print Server Settings

tab.

Click

Wireless LAN

Change the wireless setting of the printer.

Click

Apply New Settings

Click

Restart Printer

Change the wireless settings on your computer or access point accordingly.

NOTE:

To change the wireless settings on your computer, refer to the manuals provided with the wireless adapter or if

your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using that tool.

Connecting Your Printer

Connecting the Telephone Line

NOTE:

Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you

will need to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.

Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the other end to an active wall jack.

Remove the blue plug from the phone connector ( ).

To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, plug the telephone or answering machine line

cord into the phone connector ( ).

Wall jack connector

To the wall jack

Phone connector

Blue plug

Phone connector

To an external telephone or

answering machine

Connecting Your Printer

If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy,

France and Switzerland), and you are supplied with a yellow terminator, insert the yellow terminator into the

phone connector ( ).

Turning on the Printer

WARNING:

Do not use extension cords or power strips.

WARNING:

The printer should not be connected to an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system.

Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of your printer (see "Rear View" on page 23).

Connect the other end of the cable to the power source.

Phone connector

Yellow terminator

Connecting Your Printer

Turn o n the p rinte r.

NOTE:

When you turn on the printer for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions on the operator panel to configure the

initial settings. For details, see "Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel" on page 38.

Setting Up Your Printer

Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel

You need to set the language, country, time zone, date and time when you turn on printer for the first time.

NOTE:

When you turn on the printer for the first time, the setup wizard appears on the LCD panel. If you do not proceed with the

setup within 3 minutes, the status of the printer changes to

Ready to Copy

. If you want to run the setup wizard again,

select

Power On Wizard

from the LCD panel.

NOTE:

For more information on operator panel, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 117.

Ensure that

Please Select Language

appears, and then select the language you want to use on the

operator panel from the drop-down list, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Set)

button to start setting the country.

Ensure that

Please Select Country

appears. Select your country from the drop-down list, and then press

the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Please Select Time Zone

appears. Select the appropriate time zone from the following drop-

down list, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Geographic Region Time Zone

Africa (UTC) Accra, Bamako, Dakar, Nouakchott

(UTC) Casablanca

(UTC +01:00) Algiers, Douala, Libreville, Luanda

(UTC +01:00) Tunis

(UTC +01:00) Windhoek

(UTC +02:00) Cairo

(UTC +02:00) Harare, Johannesburg, Kinshasa, Tripoli

(UTC +03:00) Addis Ababa, Khartoum, Mogadishu, Nairobi

Setting Up Your Printer

Americas (UTC -10:00) Adak

(UTC -09:00) Alaska

(UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)

(UTC -08:00) Tijuana

(UTC -07:00) Arizona, Dawson Creek, Sonora

(UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan

(UTC -07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)

(UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey

(UTC -06:00) Central America

(UTC -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)

(UTC -06:00) Saskatchewan

(UTC -05:00) Atikokan, Resolute

(UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama, Quito

(UTC -05:00) Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Port-au-Prince

(UTC -05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)

(UTC -05:00) Grand Turk

(UTC -05:00) Havana

(UTC -04:30) Caracas

(UTC -04:00) Asuncion

(UTC -04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)

(UTC -04:00) Blanc-Sablon

(UTC -04:00) Caribbean Islands

(UTC -04:00) Cuiaba

(UTC -04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, Manaus

(UTC -04:00) Thule

(UTC -03:30) St. John's

(UTC -03:00) Brasilia, Cayenne, Paramaribo

(UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires

(UTC -03:00) Greenland

(UTC -03:00) Miquelon

(UTC -03:00) Montevideo

(UTC -02:00) Noronha

Antarctica (UTC -04:00) Palmer Archipelago, Santiago

(UTC -03:00) Rothera

(UTC +03:00) Syowa

(UTC +06:00) Mawson, Vostok

(UTC +07:00) Davis

(UTC +08:00) Casey

(UTC +10:00) Dumont d'Urville

(UTC +12:00) McMurdo

Geographic Region Time Zone

Setting Up Your Printer

Asia (UTC +02:00) Amman

(UTC +02:00) Beirut

(UTC +02:00) Damascus

(UTC +02:00) Jerusalem

(UTC +02:00) Nicosia

(UTC +02:00) Palestine

(UTC +03:00) Aden, Baghdad, Qatar, Riyadh

(UTC +03:30) Tehran

(UTC +04:00) Baku

(UTC +04:00) Dubai, Muscat, Tbilisi

(UTC +04:00) Yerevan

(UTC +04:30) Kabul

(UTC +05:00) Aqtau, Aqtobe, Ashgabat, Samarkand

(UTC +05:00) Ekaterinburg

(UTC +05:00) Karachi

(UTC +05:30) Colombo, Kolkata

(UTC +05:45) Kathmandu

(UTC +06:00) Almaty, Bishkek, Dhaka, Thimphu

(UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk

(UTC +06:30) Yangon (Rangoon)

(UTC +07:00) Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh, Hovd, Jakarta

(UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk

(UTC +08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Shanghai

(UTC +08:00) Irkutsk

(UTC +08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Makassar, Manila, Singapore

(UTC +08:00) Taipei

(UTC +08:00) Ulaan Baatar

(UTC +09:00) Dili, Jayapura

(UTC +09:00) Pyongyang

(UTC +09:00) Seoul

(UTC +09:00) Tokyo

(UTC +09:00) Yakutsk

(UTC +10:00) Sakhalin, Vladivostok

(UTC +11:00) Magadan

(UTC +12:00) Anadyr, Kamchatka

Atlantic Ocean (UTC -04:00) Bermuda

(UTC -04:00) Stanley

(UTC -02:00) South Georgia Island

(UTC -01:00) Azores, Scoresbysund

(UTC -01:00) Cape Verde

(UTC) Reykjavik

Geographic Region Time Zone

Setting Up Your Printer

Australia (UTC +08:00) Perth

(UTC +08:45) Eucla

(UTC +09:30) Adelaide

(UTC +09:30) Darwin

(UTC +10:00) Brisbane, Lindeman

(UTC +10:00) Hobart, Melbourne, Sydney

(UTC +10:30) Lord Howe Island

Europe (UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London

(UTC +01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna

(UTC +01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Prague

(UTC +01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris

(UTC +01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb

(UTC +02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul

(UTC +02:00) Helsinki, Kiev, Riga, Sofia

(UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk

(UTC +03:00) Moscow

(UTC +04:00) Samara

Indian Ocean (UTC +03:00) Antananarivo, Comoro Islands, Mayotte

(UTC +04:00) Mahe, Reunion

(UTC +04:00) Mauritius

(UTC +05:00) Kerguelen, Maldives

(UTC +06:00) Chagos

(UTC +06:30) Cocos Islands

(UTC +07:00) Christmas Island

Pacific Ocean (UTC -11:00) Midway Island, Niue, Samoa

(UTC -10:00) Cook Islands, Hawaii, Tahiti

(UTC -09:30) Marquesas Islands

(UTC -09:00) Gambier Islands

(UTC -08:00) Pitcairn Islands

(UTC -06:00) Easter Island

(UTC -06:00) Galapagos Islands

(UTC +09:00) Palau

(UTC +10:00) Guam, Port Moresby, Saipan

(UTC +11:00) Efate, Guadalcanal, Kosrae

(UTC +11:30) Norfolk Island

(UTC +12:00) Auckland

(UTC +12:00) Fiji, Marshall Islands

(UTC +12:45) Chatham

(UTC +13:00) Tongatapu

(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati

Geographic Region Time Zone

Setting Up Your Printer

Ensure that

Please Enter Date

appears. Specify the current date, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Please Enter Time

appears. Specify the current time, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Set)

button for specifying fax settings.

If you want to skip the steps for specifying fax settings, press the

(Start)

button and then restart the printer.

Ensure that

Please Enter Fax Number

appears. Enter your fax number, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Enter Fax Header Name

appears. Enter a name, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Set)

button, and then restart the printer.

Printer Setup Using the Software and Documentation Disc

Insert the

Software and Documentation

disc into your computer to start

Dell Printer Easy Install

Double-click the

Dell Color MFP E525w Installer

icon, and follow the on-screen instructions to connect the

computer and the printer.

NOTE:

If the Software and Documentation disc does not automatically launch, try the following steps.

For Windows Vista

, Windows

7, Windows Server

2003, Windows Server

2008, and Windows Server

2008 R2:

Click

Start



All Programs

(for Windows Vista

and Windows



Accessories

(for Windows Vista

and

Windows



Run

Enter

D:\setup.exe

(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click

For Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2:

Point to the bottom right corner of the screen, and then click



Enter

Run

in the search box, click

Apps

and then click

Run

Enter

D:\setup.exe

(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click

Setting the IP Address

Assigning an IP Address

An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to

three digits in each section, for example, 192.0.2.1.

You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack and IPv4 Mode. If your network supports both the IPv4 and IPv6

mode, select Dual Stack.

CAUTION:

Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.

NOTE:

Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator.

NOTE:

When you assign an IP address manually in the IPv6 mode, use the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. To open the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link local address. To check a link local address, see "Verifying the IP Address" on

page 45.

NOTE:

Depending on the address class, the range of the IP address assigned may be different. On Class A, for example, an IP

address in the range from

0.0.0.0

127.255.255.255

will be assigned. For assignment of IP addresses, contact

your system administrator.

You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or using the Tool Box. The following procedure describes

how to assign an IP address manually as an example.

Operator Panel

For more information on using your operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on page 70.

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

TCP/IP

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

IPv4 Ethernet

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Get IP Address

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Panel

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button and ensure that

Get IP Address

is highlighted.

Press the button until

IP Address

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the IP address.

Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad.

Press the button.

The next three digits are highlighted.

Repeat step 11 and step 12 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button and ensure that

IP Address

is highlighted.

Press the button until

Subnet Mask

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the subnet mask.

Setting the IP Address

Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad.

Press the button.

The next three digits are highlighted.

Repeat step 16 and step 17 to set subnet mask, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

button and ensure that

Subnet Mask

is highlighted.

Press the button until

Gateway Address

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the gateway address.

Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad.

Press the button.

The next three digits are highlighted.

Repeat step 21 and step 22 to set gateway address, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Turn off and turn on the printer.

Tool Box

NOTE:

When you use the IPv6 mode for network printing, the Tool Box cannot be used to assign an IP address.

Click

Start



All Programs



Dell Printers



Dell Printer Hub

Dell Printer Hub opens.

Select

Dell Color MFP E525w

print driver at

My Printers

Click on the link

Tool Box

from list at the left side of the page.

NOTE:

The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this

case, click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name.

The

Tool Box

opens.

Click the

System Settings

tab.

Select

Printer Information and Settings

from the list at the left side of the page.

Click

TCP/IP Settings

The

TCP/IP Settings

page is displayed.

Select

Panel

from

IP Address Mode

, and then enter the values in

IP Address

Subnet Mask

, and

Gateway Address

Click

Apply New Settings

Setting the IP Address

Verifying the IP Address

You can confirm the IP address of the printer by using the operator panel or printing the system settings. To verify

that the address is active on the network, you can use the PING command from your computer.

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

Operator Panel

Press the (

Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

TCP/IP

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

IPv4 Ethernet

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Check the IP address displayed on the operator panel.

System Settings Report

Print the system settings report.

For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel" on

page 129.

Check the IP address listed under

Wired Network

Wireless Network

in the report.

If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your

printer, see "Assigning an IP Address" on page 43.

Ping Command

Ping the printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a network computer, enter ping

followed by the new IP address (for example, 192.0.2.1):

ping 192.0.2.1

If the printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.

Loading Paper

NOTE:

To avoid paper jams, do not remove the standard 150 sheet tray while printing.

NOTE:

Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.

NOTE:

For printing envelopes, see "Loading Print Media" on page 168.

Hold the tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Open the dust cover, and adjust the paper guides.

Loading Paper

NOTE:

When loading legal size or user-specified print media, slide the extendable part of the tray while pinching the lever.

Before loading the print media, flex the sheets and fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.

NOTE:

Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.

NOTE:

When loading coated paper, load one sheet at a time.

Align the width guides and length guide against the edges of the print media.

Loading Paper

After confirming that the guides are adjusted and secured, close the dust cover and insert the tray into the printer.

Inserting back the tray displays the message on the LCD panel prompting you to specify the paper size in the tray.

Press the button until the appropriate paper size is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

) button.

Press the button until the appropriate paper type is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

) button.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running

Windows

Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status

Before installing the printer driver on your computer, check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the

procedures in "Verifying the IP Address" on page 45.

Changing the Firewall Settings Before Installing Your Printer

If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must change the firewall settings before installing the

Dell printer software:

• Microsoft

Windows Vista

•Windows

8.1

•Windows Server

2008

•Windows Server

2008 R2

•Windows Server

2012

•Windows Server

2012 R2

The following procedure uses Windows

7 as an example.

Insert the

Software and Documentation

disc into your computer.

Click

Start



Control Panel

Select

System and Security

Click

Allow a program through Windows Firewall

Click

Change settings



Allow another program

Click

Browse

Enter

D:\setup.exe

(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the

File name

text box, and then click

Open

Click

Add

, and then click

USB Connection Setup

Installing PCL, PS and Fax Printer Drivers

Insert the

Software and Documentation

disc into your computer to start

Dell Printer Easy Install

Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable and the printer is turned on.

Click

Main Menu

Click

Connect

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Select

USB Cable Connection

, and then click

The Plug and Play installation starts and the required driver and software are automatically installed.

Click

Finish

to exit the wizard when the

Ready to Print!

screen appears.

Installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) Printer Driver

NOTE:

The XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista

, Windows

Vista

64-bit Edition, Windows

7, Windows

7 64-bit Edition, Windows

8, Windows

8 64-bit Edition, Windows

8.1,

Windows

8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server

2008, Windows Server

2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server

2008 R2, Windows

Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2.

NOTE:

When the User Account Control dialog box appears during installation, click Continue or Yes if you are an administrator

on the computer; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

For Windows Vista® or Windows Vista® 64-bit Edition

Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_E525w.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)

Click

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

Click

Add a printer

Click

Add a local printer

Select the port connected to this printer, and then click

Click

Have Disk

to display the

Install From Disk

dialog box.

Click

Browse

, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

Click

Select your printer name and click

To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the

Printer name

text box, and then click

To use this printer as the default printer, select the

Set as the default printer

check box, and then click

Installation starts.

As the driver installation is completed, click

Print a test page

to verify installation.

Click

Finish

For Windows Server® 2008 or Windows Server® 2008 64-bit Edition

NOTE:

You must log in as an administrator.

Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_E525w.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)

Click

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

Click

Add a printer

Click

Add a local printer

Select the port connected to this printer, and then click

Click

Have Disk

to display the

Install From Disk

dialog box.

Click

Browse

, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

Click

Select your printer name and click

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the

Printer name

text box, and then click

To use this printer as the default printer, select the

Set as the default printer

check box, and then click

Installation starts.

If you do not share your printer, select

Do not share this printer

. If you share your printer, select

Share this printer

so that others on your network can find and use it

. Click

As the driver installation is completed, click

Print a test page

to verify installation.

Click

Finish

For Windows® 7, Windows® 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server® 2008 R2

Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_E525w.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)

Click

Start



Devices and Printers

Click

Add a printer

Click

Add a local printer

Select the port connected to this printer, and then click

Click

Have Disk

to display the

Install From Disk

dialog box.

Click

Browse

, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

Click

Select your printer name and click

To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the

Printer name

text box, and then click

Installation starts.

If you do not share your printer, select

Do not share this printer

. If you share your printer, select

Share this printer

so that others on your network can find and use it

. Click

As the driver installation is completed, click

Print a test page

to verify installation. To use this printer as the default

printer, select the

Set as the default printer

check box.

Click

Finish

For Windows® 8, Windows® 8 64-bit Edition, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2012, or

Windows Server® 2012 R2

Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_E525w.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel

Click

Hardware and Sound

(

Hardware

for Windows Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2)



Devices and

Printers



Add a printer

Click

The printer that I want isn't listed

Select

Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings

, and then click

Select the port connected to your printer, and then click

Click

Have Disk

to display the

Install From Disk

dialog box.

Click

Browse

, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

Click

Select your printer name and click

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the

Printer name

text box, and then click

Installation starts.

If you do not share your printer, select

Do not share this printer

. If you share your printer, select

Share this printer

so that others on your network can find and use it.

Click

As the driver installation is completed, click

Print a test page

to verify installation. To use this printer as the default

printer, select the

Set as the default printer

check box.

Click

Finish

Network Connection Setup

Installing PCL, PS and Fax Printer Drivers

Insert the

Software and Documentation

disc into your computer to start

Dell Printer Easy Install

Click

Main Menu

Click

Connect

Select

Wireless or Ethernet Connection

, and then click

Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click

. If the target printer is not displayed

on the list, click the (Refresh) button or click

add printer

to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify

the IP address and port name at this point.

If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select the

I am

setting up this printer on a server

check

box.

NOTE:

If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows Security Alert is displayed:

•Windows Vista

64-bit Edition

•Windows

7 64-bit Edition

•Windows

8 64-bit Edition

•Windows

8.1

•Windows

8.1 64-bit Edition

•Windows Server

2008

•Windows Server

2008 64-bit Edition

•Windows Server

2008 R2 64-bit Edition

•Windows Server

2012

•Windows Server

2012 R2

To continue installing the driver, click

Unblock

Allow access

(for Windows Server

2008 R2 and Windows

7).

Specify the printer settings as necessary, and then click

Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click

Install

You can specify folders in which to install the software and documentation. To change the folders, click

Change

Destination Folder

, and then specify a new location.

Click

Finish

to exit the wizard when the

Ready to Print!

screen appears.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) Printer Driver

NOTE:

The XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista

, Windows

Vista

64-bit Edition, Windows

7, Windows

7 64-bit Edition, Windows

8, Windows

8 64-bit Edition, Windows

8.1,

Windows

8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server

2008, Windows Server

2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server

2008 R2, Windows

Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2.

NOTE:

When the User Account Control dialog box appears during installation, click Continue or Yes if you are an administrator

on the computer; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

For Windows Vista® or Windows Vista® 64-bit Edition

Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_E525w.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)

Click

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

Click

Add a printer

Click

Add a network

wireless or Bluetooth printer

Select your printer or click

The printer that I want isn't listed

When you select your printer, go to step 8.

When you click

The printer that I want isn't listed

, go to step 6.

Select

Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname

, and then click

Select

TCP/IP Device

for

Device type

, and enter the IP address for

Hostname or IP address

, and then click

Click

Have Disk

to display the

Install From Disk

dialog box.

Click

Browse

, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click

Select your printer name and click

To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the

Printer name

text box, and then click

To use this printer as the default printer, select the

Set as the default printer

check box.

Installation starts.

As the driver installation is completed, click

Print a test page

to verify installation.

Click

Finish

For Windows Server® 2008 or Windows Server® 2008 64-bit Edition

NOTE:

You must log in as an administrator.

Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_E525w.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)

Click

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

Click

Add a printer

Click

Add a network

wireless or Bluetooth printer

Select your printer or click

The printer that I want isn't listed

When you select your printer, go to step 8.

When you click

The printer that I want isn't listed

, go to step 6.

Select

Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname

, and then click

Select

TCP/IP Device

from

Device type

, and enter the IP address for

Hostname or IP address

, and then click

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Click

Have Disk

to display the

Install From Disk

dialog box.

Click

Browse

, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click

Select your printer name and click

To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the

Printer name

text box, and then click

To use this printer as the default printer, select the

Set as the default printer

check box.

Installation starts.

If you do not share your printer, select

Do not share this printer

. If you share your printer, select

Share this printer

so that others on your network can find and use it

. Click

As the driver installation is completed, click

Print a test page

to verify installation.

Click

Finish

For Windows® 7, Windows® 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server® 2008 R2

Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_E525w.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)

Click

Start



Devices and Printers

Click

Add a printer

Click

Add a network

wireless or Bluetooth printer

Select your printer or click

The printer that I want isn't listed

When you select your printer, go to step 8.

When you click

The printer that I want isn't listed

, go to step 6.

Select

Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname

, and then click

Select

TCP/IP Device

from

Device type

, and enter the IP address for

Hostname or IP address

, and then click

Click

Have Disk

to display the

Install From Disk

dialog box.

Click

Browse

, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click

Select your printer name and click

To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the

Printer name

text box, and then click

Installation starts.

If you do not share your printer, select

Do not share this printer

. If you share your printer, select

Share this printer

so that others on your network can find and use it.

Click

As the driver installation is completed, click

Print a test page

to verify installation. To use this printer as the default

printer, select the

Set as the default printer

check box.

Click

Finish

For Windows® 8, Windows® 8 64-bit Edition, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2012, or

Windows Server® 2012 R2

Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_E525w.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel

Click

Hardware and Sound

(

Hardware

for Windows Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2)



Devices and

Printers



Add a printer

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Select your printer or click

The printer that I want isn't listed

When you select your printer, go to step 7.

When you click

The printer that I want isn't listed

, go to step 5.

Select

Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname

, and then click

Select

TCP/IP Device

from

Device type

, and enter the IP address for

Hostname or IP address

, and then click

Click

Have Disk

to display the

Install From Disk

dialog box.

Click

Browse

, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

Click

Select your printer name and click

To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the

Printer name

text box, and then click

Installation starts.

If you do not share your printer, select

Do not share this printer

. If you share your printer, select

Share this printer

so that others on your network can find and use it.

Click

As the driver installation is completed, click

Print a test page

to verify installation. To use this printer as the default

printer, select the

Set as the default printer

check box.

Click

Finish

Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your

desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering

replacement consumables. You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies.

NOTE:

The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print

server.

To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the printer's IP address in your web browser. The printer

configuration appears on the screen.

You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or

intervention.

To set up e-mail alerts:

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Click

E-mail Alert

Enter the

Primary SMTP Gateway

Reply Address

, and your e-mail address in the e-mail list box.

Click

Apply New Settings

Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD)

This section provides information for network printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD), the protocol of

Microsoft

for Windows Vista

, Windows

7, Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2008, Windows

Server

2008 R2, Windows Server

2012, and Windows Server

2012 R2.

Adding Roles of Print Services

When you use Windows Server

2008, Windows Server

2008 R2, Windows Server

2012, or Windows Server

2012 R2, you need to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server

2008, Windows Server

2008 R2,

Windows Server

2012, or Windows Server

2012 R2 client.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

For Windows Server® 2008 R2

Click

Start



Administrative Tools



Server Manager

Select

Add Roles

from the

Action

menu.

Select the

Print and Document Services

check box on the

Server Roles

window in the

Add Roles Wizard

, and then

click

Click

Select the

Print Server

check box, and then click

Click

Install

For Windows Server® 2008

Click

Start



Administrative Tools



Server Manager

Select

Add Roles

from the

Action

menu.

Select the

Print Services

check box on the

Server Roles

window in the

Add Roles Wizard

, and then click

Select the

Print Server

check box, and then click

Click

Install

For Windows Server® 2012 or Windows Server® 2012 R2

Click

Server Manager

of the

Start

screen.

Select

Add Roles and Features

from the

Manage

menu.

Click

on the

Before You Begin

window



Select installation type on the

Installation Type

window



Select

destination server on the

Server Selection

window in the

Add Roles and Features Wizard

Select the

Print and Document Services

check box on the

Server Roles

window, and then click

Select features on the

Features

window



Confirm installation selections on the

Confirmation

window.

Click

Install

Web Services on Devices (WSD) Printer Setup

You can install your new printer on the network using the Add Printer wizard. When installing using the

Software

and Documentation

disc that shipped with your printer, see "Network Connection Setup" on page 52 for details.

NOTE:

Installing Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer for Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2008, Windows

Server

2008 R2, Windows Server

2012, and Windows Server

2012 R2 is available only with the Add Printer wizard.

Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard

NOTE:

Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server

2008 R2 or Windows

7, perform one of the

followings:

•Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer.

•Add the printer driver to your computer in advance.

For Windows Vista

, Windows

7, Windows Server

2008, and Windows Server

2008 R2:

Click

Start



Devices and Printers

(

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

for Windows

Server

2008 and Windows Vista

For Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2012, and Windows Server

2012 R2:

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel



Hardware and Sound

(

Hardware

for Windows Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2)



Devices and Printers

Click

Add a printer

For Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2012, and Windows Server

2012 R2, go to step 4.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Select

Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer

In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click

Select the printer whose address is displayed in the form of

http://IP address/ws/

NOTE:

If no printer is displayed in the list, follow the instructions below to enter the printer's IP address manually to

directly specify the printer you want to use. For Windows Server

2008 R2, you must be a member of Administrators group.

1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.

2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click Next.

3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.

4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box, and then click Next.

Install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation,

enter the password or provide confirmation.

Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click

Finish

Print a test page to verify installation.

For Windows Vista

, Windows

7, Windows Server

2008, and Windows Server

2008 R2:

Click

Start



Devices and Printers

(

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

for Windows

Server

2008 and Windows Vista

For Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2012, and Windows Server

2012 R2:

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel



Hardware and Sound

(

Hardware

for Windows Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2)



Devices and Printers

Right-click the printer you just created, and then click

Printer properties

(

Properties

for Windows Server

2008 and Windows Vista

On the

General

tab, click

Print Test Page

. When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

Setting Up for Shared Printing

You can share your USB connected printer with other computers (clients) on the same network.

To share your USB connected printer, enable shared printing when installing the printer driver. You can also enable

shared printing by following the procedures below.

NOTE:

Printer utilities such as Tool Box cannot be used from a network client.

Enabling Shared Printing From the Computer

For Windows Server® 2003 or Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition

Click

Start



Printers and Faxes

Right-click this printer icon and select

Properties

From the

Sharing

tab, select the

Share this printer

check box, and then enter a name in the

Share name

text box.

Click

Additional Drivers

and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.

Click

If the files are not present in your computer, insert the server operating system CD.

For Windows Vista® or Windows Vista® 64-bit Edition

Click

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

Right-click the printer icon and select

Sharing

Click

Change sharing options

The "

Windows needs your permission to continue

" dialog box appears.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Click

Continue

Select the

Share this printer

check box, and then enter a name in the

Share name

text box.

Click

Additional Drivers

and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.

Click

For Windows Server® 2008 or Windows Server® 2008 64-bit Edition

Click

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

Right-click the printer icon and select

Sharing

Click

Change Sharing Options

if exists.

Select the

Share this printer

check box, and then enter a name in the

Share name

text box.

Click

Additional Drivers

and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.

Click

For Windows® 7, Windows® 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server® 2008 R2

Click

Start



Devices and Printers

Right-click the printer icon and select

Printer properties

On the

Sharing

tab, click

Change Sharing Options

if exists.

Select the

Share this printer

check box, and then enter a name in the

Share name

text box.

Click

Additional Drivers

and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.

Click

Apply

, and then click

For Windows® 8, Windows® 8 64-bit Edition, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2012, or

Windows Server® 2012 R2

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel



Hardware and Sound

(

Hardware

for Windows Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2)



Devices and Printers

Right-click the printer icon and select

Printer properties

On the

Sharing

tab, click

Change Sharing Options

if exists.

Select the

Share this printer

check box, and then enter a name in the

Share name

text box.

Click

Additional Drivers

and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.

Click

Apply

, and then click

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

Checking the Shared Printer

To check that the printer is shared:

• Ensure that the printer object in the

Printers, Printers and Faxes, or Devices and Printers

folder is shared. The

share icon is shown under the printer icon.

• From a network client, browse

Network or My Network Places

. Find the host name of the server and look for the

shared name you assigned to the printer.

After you have checked that the printer is shared, use methods such as Windows

Point and Print to use the shared

printer from a network client.

NOTE:

If the OS bit editions (32/64 bit edition) differ between a print server and a client computer, you need to manually add the

printer driver for the client computer edition on the server. Otherwise, the printer driver cannot be installed on the client

computer using methods such as Point and Print. For example, if the print server runs on Windows Vista

32-bit edition, while

the client computer runs on Windows

7 64-bit edition, follow the procedures below to additionally install the printer driver for

64-bit client on the 32-bit server.

Click

Additional Drivers

on the screen for sharing printers.

For details about how to display this screen, see "Enabling Shared Printing From the Computer" on page 57.

Select the

x64

check box, and then click

Insert the

Software and Documentation

disc into your computer.

Click

Browse

to specify the folder that contains the 64-bit OS driver, and then click

Installation starts.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running

Macintosh

Installing the Drivers and Software

Run the

Software and Documentation

disc on the Macintosh computer.

Double-click the

Dell Color MFP E525w Installer

icon.

Click

Continue

on the

Introduction

screen.

Click

Continue

on the

License

screen, and then click

Agree

Confirm the installation location, and then click

Install

to perform the standard installation.

Enter the administrator's name and password, and then click

Install Software

(

for Mac OS X 10.6).

Click

Continue Installation

Click

Restart

to finish installing the software.

Connecting Your Computer to the Printer

When Using a USB Connection

Turn o n the p rinte r.

Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.

The printer is automatically added to your Macintosh computer.

When Using Bonjour

Turn o n the p rinte r.

Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.

If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.

If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer

and printer.

For Mac OS X 10.6: Open the

System Preferences

, and click

Print & Fax

For OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Open the

System Preferences

, and click

Print & Scan

For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Open the

System Preferences

, and click

Printers & Scanners

Click the Plus (+) sign, and select

Add Printer or Scanner

(

Add Other Printer or Scanner

for OS X 10.7).

For Mac OS X 10.6, just click the Plus (+) sign.

Click

Default

, and select the printer connected via Bonjour from the

Name

(

Printer Name

for Mac OS X 10.6 and

OS X 10.7) list.

Name

and

Use

(

Print Using

for Mac OS X 10.6 and OS X 10.7) are automatically entered. Make sure that your

printer name is selected for

Use

Print Using

Click

Add

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

When Using IP Printing

Turn o n the p rinte r.

Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.

If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.

If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer

and printer.

For Mac OS X 10.6: Open the

System Preferences

, and click

Print & Fax

For OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Open the

System Preferences

, and click

Print & Scan

For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Open the

System Preferences

, and click

Printers & Scanners

Click the Plus (+) sign, and select

Add Printer or Scanner

(

Add Other Printer or Scanner

for OS X 10.7).

For Mac OS X 10.6, just click the Plus (+) sign.

Click

, and select

Line Printer Daemon - LPD

for

Protocol

Enter the IP address for the printer in the

Address

area.

Select your printer name for

Use

(

Print Using

for Mac OS X 10.6 and OS X 10.7).

NOTE:

When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.

Click

Add

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

This section provides information for installing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS (Common UNIX Printing

System) on Red Hat

Enterprise Linux

6.1 Desktop, SUSE

Linux Enterprise Desktop 11, and Ubuntu

12.04.

Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1 Desktop

Setup Overview

Install the printer driver.

Set up the print queue.

Specify the default queue.

Specify the printing options.

Installing the Printer Driver

Select

Applications



System Tools



Terminal

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

The printer driver is installed.

Setting Up the Queue

To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.

Open the URL

"http://localhost:631"

using a web browser.

Click

Administration

Click

Add Printer

Enter

root

as the user name, enter the administrator password, and click

For network connections:

Select

LPD/LPR Host or Printer

from the

Other Network Printers

menu, and click

Continue

Enter the IP address of the printer in

Connection

, and click

Continue

Format:

lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

(the IP address of the printer)

For USB connections:

Select your printer name from the

Local Printers

menu, and click

Continue

Enter the name of the printer in the

Name

text box in the

Add Printer

window, and click

Continue

You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.

Select

Dell

from the

Make

menu, and click

Continue

(Enter the administrator password)

rpm -ivh (Enter the file path)/Dell-Color-MFP-

E525w-x.x-x.noarch.rpm

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Select your printer name from the

Model

menu, and click

Add Printer

The setup is complete.

Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the

application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).

In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on

specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue

Select

Applications



System Tools



Terminal

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

Specifying the Printing Options

You can specify the printing options such as color mode.

Open the URL

"http://localhost:631"

using a web browser.

Click

Administration

Click

Manage Printers

Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.

Select

Set Default Options

from the

Administration

menu.

Click the desired setting item, specify the required settings, and click

Set Default Options

The message

Printer xxx default options have been set successfully.

appears.

The setting is complete.

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

Select

Applications



System Tools



Ter minal

Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.

Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.

(Enter the administrator password)

lpadmin -d (Enter the queue name)

(Enter the administrator password)

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Enter the print queue name)

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

The printer driver is uninstalled.

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11

Setup Overview

Install the printer driver.

Set up the print queue.

Specify the default queue.

Specify the printing options.

Installing the Printer Driver

Select

Computer



More Applications...

and select

GNOME Terminal

on the Application Browser.

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

The printer driver is installed.

Setting Up the Queue

To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.

Select

Computer



More Applications...

and

select

YaS T

on the Application Browser.

Enter the administrator password, and click

Continue

YaST Control Center

is activated.

Select

Hardware

YaST Control Center

, and select

Printer

The

Printer Configurations

dialog box opens.

For network connections:

Click

Add

The

Add New Printer Configuration

dialog box opens.

Click

Connection Wizard

The

Connection Wizard

dialog box opens.

Select

Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol

from

Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via

Enter the IP address of the printer in

IP Address or Host Name:

(Enter the administrator password)

rpm -e Dell-Color-MFP-E525w

(Enter the administrator password)

rpm -ivh (Enter the file path)/Dell-Color-MFP-

E525w-x.x-x.noarch.rpm

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Select

Dell

in the

Select the printer manufacturer:

drop-down menu.

Click

The

Add New Printer Configuration

dialog box appears.

Select your printer name

from the

Assign Driver

list.

NOTE:

You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.

Confirm the settings, and click

For USB connections:

Click

Add

The

Add New Printer Configuration

dialog box opens.

The printer name is displayed in the

Determine Connection

list.

Select your printer name

from the

Assign Driver

list.

NOTE:

You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.

Confirm the settings, and click

Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the

application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).

In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on

specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue

You can set the default queue when you add the printer.

Select

Computer



More Applications...

and select

YaS T

on the Application Browser.

Enter the administrator password, and click

Continue

YaST Control Center

is activated.

Select

Hardware

YaST Control Cente

r, and select

Printer

The

Printer Configurations

dialog box opens.

Click

Edit

dialog box to modify the specified queue opens.

Confirm that the printer you want to set is selected in the

Connection

list.

Select the

Default Printer

check box.

Confirm the settings, and click

Specifying the Printing Options

You can specify the printing options such as color mode.

Open a web browser.

Enter

http://localhost:631/admin

Location

, and press <Enter>.

Click

Manage Printers

Click

Set Printer Options

of the printer for which you want to specify the printing options.

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Specify the required settings, and click

Set Printer Options

Enter

root

as the user name, enter the administrator password, and click

NOTE:

Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you have not set it, go to

"Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator."

The message

Printer xxx has been configured successfully.

appears.

The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application.

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator

You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations.

Select

Computer



More Applications...

and select

GNOME Terminal

on the Application Browser.

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

Select

Computer



More Applications...

and select

GNOME Terminal

on the Application Browser.

Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.

Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

The printer driver is uninstalled.

(Enter the administrator password)

lppasswd -g sys -a root

(Enter the password for authority as the printer administrator after

the Enter password prompt.)

(Re-enter the password for authority as the printer administrator

after the Enter password again prompt.)

(Enter the administrator password)

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Enter the printer queue name)

(Enter the administrator password)

rpm -e Dell-Color-MFP-E525w

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS

Setup Overview

Install the printer driver.

Set up the print queue.

Specify the default queue.

Specify the printing options.

Installing the Printer Driver

Select

Applications



System Tools



Ter minal

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

The printer driver is installed.

Setting Up the Queue

To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.

Open the URL "

http://localhost:631

" using a web browser.

Click

Administration

Click

Add Printer

Enter the user name and the administrator password, and click

Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection.

For network connections:

Select

LPD/LPR Host or Printer

from the

Other Network Printers

menu, and click

Continue

Enter the IP address of the printer in

Connection

, and click

Continue

Format:

lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

(the IP address of the printer)

For USB connections:

Select your printer name from the

Local Printers

menu, and click

Continue

Enter the name of the printer in the

Name

box in the

Add Printer

window, and click

Continue

You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.

If you want to share the printer, select the

Share This Printer

check box.

Select

Dell

from the

Make

menu, and click

Continue

Select your printer name from the

Model

menu, and click

Add Printer

The setup is complete.

sudo dpkg –i

(Enter the file path)/

dell-color-mfp-

e525w_x.x-x_all.deb

(Enter the administrator password)

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the

application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).

In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on

specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue

Select

Applications



System Tools



Ter minal

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

Specifying the Printing Options

You can specify the printing options such as color mode.

Open the URL "

http://localhost:631

" using a web browser.

Click

Administration

Click

Manage Printers

Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.

Select

Set Default Options

from the

Administration

menu.

Click the desired setting item, specify the required settings, and click

Set Default Options

The message

Printer xxx default options have been set successfully.

appears.

The setting is complete.

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

Select

Applications



System Tools



Ter minal

Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.

Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.

Enter the following command in the terminal window.

The printer driver is uninstalled.

sudo lpadmin -d

(Enter the queue name)

(Enter the administrator password)

sudo /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x

(Enter the print queue

name)

(Enter the administrator password)

sudo dpkg –e Dell-Color-MFP-E525w

(Enter the administrator password)

Using Your Printer

12 Operator Panel ............................................................................ 70

13 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool..................................... 75

14 Understanding the Printer Menus.......................................... 117

15 Print Media Guidelines............................................................. 162

16 Loading Print Media ................................................................. 168

Operator Panel

Using the Operator Panel Buttons

One Touch Dial button

• Calls up the stored fax number registered in the Phone Book. The first four fax numbers in the Phone Book are

assigned to the buttons in row order, starting from the top corner.

(Copy)

button

• Displays the Copy menu.

(Fax)

button

• Displays the Fax menu.

Data LED

• Lights up for incoming, outgoing, or pending fax jobs.

Ready / Error LED

• Lights up when the printer is ready. (Ready LED)

• Lights up when the printer has an error. (Error LED)

button

• Moves a cursor to the right or left.

button

• Moves a cursor up or down.

(Set)

button

• Confirms the entry of values.

(Contacts)

button

• Displays the Address Book menu for e-mail addresses.

(Redial / Pause)

button

• Calls up the last called number.

• Pauses a telephone number.

(Cancel)

button

• Cancels the current processing or pending job.

• Resets the current setting, and returns to the top menu.

Operator Panel

B&W / Color

LED

• Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected.

(Color Mode)

button

• Switches between color mode and black and white mode.

(Start)

button

•Starts the job.

(ID Copy)

button

• Shortcuts to the ID Card Copy screen.

(Phone Book)

button

• Displays stored telephone numbers in the Phone Book.

Numeric keypad

• Enters characters and numbers.

(Backspace)

button

• Deletes characters and numbers.

(Back)

button

• Returns to the previous screen.

LCD Panel

• Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.

(Scan)

button

• Displays the Scan menu.

(Menu)

button

• Displays the Print from USB Memory, Job Status, and System menus.

(Wi-Fi | WPS)

button

• Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup

(Push Button Configuration). Lights up when it is activated, and blinks in

certain conditions.

NOTE:

Displaying a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Make sure to press the

(Set) button to save the current entry or setting.

NOTE:

For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter

Characters" on page 73.

Operator Panel

Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight

This section describes when the backlight of the (Wi-Fi | WPS) button lights up or blinks.

For more information, see "Wireless Problems" on page 306.

You can enable/disable the

Wi-Fi

settings. For more information, see "Wi-Fi" on page 142.

Wi-Fi | WPS button backlight Wi-Fi

settings

Printer status

Off N/A Connecting to the network via Ethernet cable. Wireless connection is not

available when an Ethernet cable is connected to the printer

Off

The printer enters Sleep/Deep Sleep mode

Failed to connect with wireless LAN access point or router

Wireless link established

Blinking

Searching with wireless LAN access point or router

Blinking slowly

Connecting with wireless LAN access point or router

Operator Panel

Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters

As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For example, when you set up your printer,

you enter your name or your company name and telephone number. When you store speed dial or group dial

numbers, you may also need to enter the corresponding names.

• When entering a letter, press the appropriate button until your desired letter appears on the display.

For example, to enter the letter O, press 6.

– Each time you press 6, the display shows the letter, M, N, O and finally 6.

– To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.

–Press the

(Set)

button when you are finished.

Keypad Letters and Numbers

Changing Numbers or Names

If an incorrect name or number is entered, press the (Backspace) button to delete the last digit or character.

Then enter the correct number or character.

Inserting a Pause

For some telephone systems, it is necessary to enter an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause must be

entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the

(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display when a pause is entered.

Key Assigned numbers, letters or characters

1@ . _ ! " # $ % & ' ~^ | ` ; : ? , (space) + - * / = ( ) [ ] { } < > 1

2a b c A B C 2

3 d e f D E F 3

4g h i G H I 4

5j k l J K L 5

6m n o M N O 6

7p q r s P Q R S 7

8t u v T U V 8

9w x y z W X Y Z 9

*- _ ~

#@ . ' #

Operator Panel

Printing a Panel Settings Page

You can check the current settings of the printer menus. For details about how to print a panel settings report, see

"Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 117.

Changing the Language

To display a different language on the operator panel:

Operator Panel

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Panel Language

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired language is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Tool Box

Click

Start



All Programs



Dell Printers



Dell Printer Hub

Dell Printer Hub opens.

Select

Dell Color MFP E525w

print driver at

My Printers

Click on the link

Tool Box

from list at the left side of the page.

The

Tool Box

opens.

Click the

System Settings

tab.

Select

Printer Information and Settings

from the list at the left side of the page.

The

System Settings

page is displayed.

Click

System Settings

Select the desired language from

Panel Language

, and then click

Apply New Settings

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable.

In this case, enter

the password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

You can set the timer to save the power consumption of the printer. The printer waits before it restores the default

copy settings, if you do not start copying after changing them on the operator panel.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

System Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Power Saver Timer

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to select

Sleep

Deep Sleep

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

You can select from 5

–

30 minutes for

Sleep

or 1

–

6 minutes for

Deep Sleep

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Overview

NOTE:

This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network.

One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is the E-mail Alert setup, which sends an e-mail to

you or the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention.

To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer

Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the

network to display the asset tag number.

The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of

printing trends.

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web browser before using the Dell Printer

Configuration Web Tool.

NOTE:

The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be unreadable if the language differs from that of your web browser.

Setting Up From Web Browser

It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel

before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

For Internet Explorer®

Setting Up the Display Language

Select

Internet Options

from

Tools

on the menu bar.

Select

Languages

in the

General

tab.

Specify the display language in order of preference in the

Language

list.

For example:

• Italian (Italy) [it-IT]

• Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]

• German (Germany) [de-DE]

• French (France) [fr-FR]

• English (United States) [en-us]

•Danish [da-DK]

• Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]

• Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]

• Swedish [sv-SE]

Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy

Select

Internet Options

from the

Tools

menu.

Click

LAN Settings

under

Local Area Network (LAN) settings

in the

Connections

tab.

You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:

•Clear the

Use a proxy server for your LAN

check box under

Proxy server

•Click

Advanced

, and then specify the IP address of your printer in the

Do not use proxy server for addresses

beginning with

field under

Exceptions

After setting the language and proxy, enter <http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the IP address of your printer) in

the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Setting Up From Operator Panel

You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to Enable (the factory default) on

the operator panel. Check the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

For more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 117.

Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the System Settings or display the TCP/IP Settings page,

which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Address" on

page 45.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Overview of the Menu Items

Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for:

Printer Status

Use this menu to get feedback on the printer status. When a toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies

link on the first screen to order an additional toner cartridge.

Printer Jobs

Use this menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.

These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.

Printer Settings

Use this menu to change printer settings and view the settings in the operator panel remotely.

Print Server Settings

Use this menu to change the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for communications.

Print Volume

Use this menu to check the number of pages printed for each paper size.

Address Book

Use this menu to view or edit the e-mail address, phone number, server address, and fax number entries in the

Address Book, or to register new entries.

NOTE:

You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.

Printer Information

Use this menu to display the information of your printer.

Tray Settings

Use this menu to get information about the paper size and type of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

E-mail Alert

Use this menu to receive an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention. Enter your name or the key

operator name in the e-mail list box to be notified. Set E-mail Alert also when using the Scan to E-mail feature.

Set Password

Use this menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do not

inadvertently change the printer settings you selected.

NOTE:

You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.

Online Help

Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support web site.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Order Supplies at:

www.dell.com/supplies

Contact Dell Support at:

www.dell.com/support

Page Display Format

The layout of the page is divided into three sections.

Top Frame

The top frame is located on the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the

current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.

The following items are displayed in the top frame.

1Dell Color MFP E525w Displays the printer model name.

2IP Address Displays the IP address of your printer.

3Location Displays the location of the printer. The location can be changed in the Basic

Information on the Print Server Settings page.

4Contact Person Displays the administrator name of the printer. The name can be changed in the Basic

Information on the Print Server Settings page.

5Printer Bitmap Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the right

frame when you click the image.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Left Frame

The left frame is located on the left side of all pages. The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to

corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.

The following menus are displayed in the left frame.

1Printer Status Links to the Printer Status menu.

2Printer Jobs Links to the Printer Jobs menu.

3Printer Settings Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.

4Print Server Settings Links to the Print Server Reports menu.

5Print Volume Links to the Print Volume menu.

6Address Book Links to the Address Book menu.

7Printer Information Links to the Printer Status menu.

8Tray Settings Links to the Tray Settings menu.

9E-mail Alert Links to the Print Server Settings menu.

10 Set Password Links to the Security menu.

11 Online Help Links to the Dell Support website.

12 Order Supplies at: Links to the Dell web page.

13 Contact Dell Support at: Links to the Dell support page web address.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Right Frame

The right frame is located on the right side of all pages. The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu that

you select in the left frame. For details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu Items" on

page 81.

Buttons in the Right Frame

1Refresh button Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right

frame.

2Apply New Settings button Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer.

The new settings replace the old settings of the printer.

3Restore Settings button Restores the old settings. New settings will not be submitted to the printer.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items

Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When you

access these menus, the authentication window appears on the screen. Enter a user name and password of the

administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.

The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in

the Set Password page in the Security menu. For more information, see "Set Password" on page 107.

Details of the Menu Items

"Printer Status" "Printer Status"

"Printer Events"

"Printer Information"

"Printer Jobs" "Job List"

"Completed Jobs"

"Printer Settings" "Printer Settings Report" "Menu Settings"

"Reports"

"Printer Settings" "System Settings"

"USB Settings"

"PCL Settings"

"PostScript Settings"

"PDF Settings"

"Secure Settings"

"Copy Defaults"

"Copy Color Balance"

"Copy Settings"

"Fax Defaults"

"Fax Settings"

"Scan Defaults"

"Print from USB Defaults"

"Printer Maintenance" "Paper Density"

"Adjust Transfer Roller"

"Adjust Fusing Unit"

"Auto Registration Adjustment"

"Color Registration Adjustment"

"Clean Developer"

"Adjust Altitude"

"Reset Defaults"

"Non-Dell Toner"

"Clock Settings"

"Web Link Customization"

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

"Print Server Settings" "Print Server Reports" "Print Server Setup Page"

"E-mail Alert Setup Page"

"Print Server Settings" "Basic Information"

"Port Settings"

"Wireless LAN"

"Wi-Fi Direct"

"TCP/IP"

"SNMP"

"SNTP"

"Bonjour (mDNS)"

"E-mail Alert"

"Scan to PC"

"Google Cloud Print"

"Proxy Server"

"AirPrint"

"Reset Print Server"

"Security" "Set Password"

"Authentication System"

"Kerberos Server"

"LDAP Server"

"LDAP Authentication"

"LDAP User Mapping"

"SSL/TLS"

"IPsec"

"Display Network Settings"

"IP Filter (IPv4)"

"Print Volume" "Print Volume"

"Address Book" "Fax/E-mail" "Address Book - Top Page"

"Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)"

"Address Book (Delete)"

"FAX Group - Top Page"

"FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"

"FAX Group (Delete)"

"E-mail Group - Top Page"

"E-mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"

"E-mail Group (Delete)"

"E-mail Default Setup"

"Server Address" "Server Address - Top Page"

"Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)"

"Server Address (Delete)"

"Tray Settings"

*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Printer Status

Use this menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.

Printer Status

Purpose:

To check the status of the consumables and trays.

Valu es:

Printer Events

Purpose:

To check the details of all alerts or indications of faults displayed in the Printer Events page when any faults such as

Out of Paper

Rear Cover

Open

occur.

Valu es:

Printer Information

Purpose:

To display the system information of the printer. This page can also be displayed by clicking Printer Information in

the left frame.

Valu es:

Cyan Cartridge Level

Magenta Cartridge Level

Yellow Cartridge Level

Black Cartridge Level

Displays the percentage of toner remaining in each toner cartridge.

When a cartridge is empty, a message appears. The text

Call or

Order

is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies website.

Paper Trays Status Ready Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is

unknown.

Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.

Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.

Size Displays the size of paper in the tray.

Output Tray Status OK Indicates that the tray is available.

Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the output tray.

Cover Status Closed Indicates that the cover is closed.

Open Indicates that the cover is open.

Printer Type Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.

Printing Speed Displays the printing speed.

Location Displays the location where the error occurred.

Details Displays the details of the error.

Dell Service Tag Number Displays Dell's service tag number.

Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of the printer.

Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of the printer.

Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.

Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Printer Jobs

This menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the details of the

status regarding each protocol or the print jobs.

Job List

Purpose:

To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click Refresh to update the screen.

Valu es:

Completed Jobs

Purpose:

To check the completed jobs. Up to 20 latest jobs are displayed. Click Refresh to update the screen.

Valu es:

Printer Revision Levels Firmware Version Displays the version of the controller.

Network Firmware Version Displays the NIC version.

ID Displays the job ID.

Job Name

Displays the file name of the job being printed.

Owner

Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name

Displays the name of the host computer.

Job Status

Displays the status of the job being printed.

Job Type

Displays the type of the job.

Host I/F

Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted Time

Displays the date when the print job was submitted.

Displays the job ID.

Job Name

Displays the file name of the job.

Owner

Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name

Displays the name of the host computer.

Output Result

Displays the status of the job.

Job Type

Displays the type of the job.

Impression Number

Displays the total number of pages used by the print job.

No. of Sheets

Displays the total number of sheets used by the print job.

Host I/F

Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted Time

Displays the date when the job was submitted.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Printer Settings

Use this menu to display the Printer Settings Report and to configure the printer settings.

The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.

Printer Settings Report

This tab contains the Menu Settings and Reports pages.

Menu Settings

Displays the current settings of the printer menus.

Reports

Purpose:

To print the settings and history information of your printer.

Valu es:

Printer Settings

This tab contains the System Settings, USB Settings, PCL Settings, PostScript Settings, PDF Settings, Secure

Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy Settings, Scan Defaults, USB Direct Print Defaults, Fax

Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.

System Settings

Purpose:

To configure the basic printer settings.

Valu es:

System Settings Click Start to print the system settings page.

Panel Settings Click Start to print the panel settings page.

PCL Fonts List Click Start to print the PCL fonts list.

PS Fonts List Click Start to print the PS fonts list.

Job History Click Start to print the job history report.

Error History Click Start to print the error history report.

Protocol Monitor Click Start to print the protocol monitor report.

Address Book Click Start to print the address book report.

Color Test Page Click Start to print the color test page.

Fax Activity Click Start to print the fax activity report.

Stored Documents Click Start to print the stored documents list.

Power Saver Timer - Sleep

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power saver timer mode 1 after it

finishes a job.

Power Saver Timer - Deep

Sleep

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power saver timer mode 2 after it goes

into the power saver timer mode 1.

Auto Reset Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or

Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.

Panel Select Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct, or disables

the tone.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

USB Settings

Purpose:

To change USB settings on your printer.

Valu es:

PCL Settings

Purpose:

To ch ange the PC L settings.

Valu es:

Panel Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect, or disables

the tone.

Job Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is complete, or disables the tone.

Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs, or disables the tone.

Out of Paper Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper, or disables the

tone.

Auto Clear Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear, or

disables the tone.

All Tones Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.

Job Time-Out Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print

job is canceled if it times out.

Panel Language Used to set the language on the operator panel.

Disable printing with larger

paper size

Specifies whether to print jobs if the paper set in the tray of the printer is larger than the paper

size set in the printer driver (the paper size does not have to match).

Auto Log Print Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.

mm/inch

Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.

*1 Enter 5 in Power Saver Timer - Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode 5 minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less

energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you

notice lights flickering.

Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum

warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy

consumption and a shorter warm-up period.

The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer mode when it receives data from the computer. You

can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.

*2 Available only in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and the Tool Box.

*3 The default varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Port Status Enables the USB interface on your printer.

PS Data Format Sets PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol for each interface.

Paper Size Sets the paper size.

Orientation Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page.

Font Sets the font from the list of registered fonts.

Symbol Set Sets a symbol set for the specified font.

Font Size Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts.

Font Pitch Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.

Form Line Sets the number of lines in a page.

Quantity Sets the number of copies to print.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

PostScript Settings

Purpose:

To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript 3 Compatible emulation printer language.

Valu es:

PDF Settings

Purpose:

To change the PDF settings.

Valu es:

Secure Settings

Panel Lock

Purpose:

To restrict access to Admin Menu and Report / List with a password, and to set or change the password.

NOTE:

This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration

Web Tool, click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.

Valu es:

Software Download

Purpose:

To set whether to enable download of software updates.

Draft Mode Sets whether to print in the draft mode.

Line Termination Sets how to handle line terminations.

Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.

PS Error Report Sets whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript 3 Compatible page description

language are printed.

PS Job Time-Out Sets the execution time for one PostScript 3 Compatible job.

Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.

Image Depth Sets the image depth to 1-bit or 2-bit depth.

Quantity Sets the number of copies.

Print Mode Sets a print mode.

PDF Password Sets a password required to print a PDF file secured with a document open password.

Paper Size Sets the output paper size.

Layout Sets the output layout.

Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.

Panel Lock Set Restricts access to

Admin Menu

and

Report / List

with a password.

New Password Sets a password that is required to access

Admin Menu

and

Report / List

Re-enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Function Enabled

Purpose:

To enable the functions by password, and allow the user to change it.

NOTE:

This menu sets a password to limit the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services. When you change the password for the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password you change on the left frame and set the password.

Valu es:

Secure Receive

Purpose:

To set a password to secure the incoming faxes. When this feature is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and

prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.

NOTE:

This menu sets a password to lock printing incoming fax. When changing the password for the Dell Printer Configuration

Web Tool, click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.

Valu es:

Copy Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own default copy settings.

Valu es:

Copy Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Copy Service feature.

Scan Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Scan Service feature.

Fax Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Fax Service feature.

Print from USB Allows you to set a password for the USB-Print Service feature.

New Password Sets a password required to use the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services.

Re-enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm.

Secure Receive Set Allows you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes.

New Password Sets a password that is required to print incoming faxes.

Re-enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm.

Color Selects mode for color or black and white copying.

Reduce/Enlarge Sets the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.

Custom Reduce/Enlarge Sets a custom reduction/enlargement ratio within the range of 25% to 400% when Reduce/Enlarge

is set to Custom.

Original Type Sets the copy image quality.

Document Size Sets the default document size.

Lighter/Darker Sets the default copy density level.

Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Copy Color Balance

Purpose:

To specify the default color balance level.

Valu es:

Copy Settings

Purpose:

To configure the copy settings.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Valu es:

Scan Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own default scan settings.

Valu es:

Color Balance (Red) Sets the color balance level of red.

Color Balance (Green) Sets the color balance level of green.

Color Balance (Blue) Sets the color balance level of blue.

Gray Balance Sets the gray balance level.

Multiple-Up Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto Automatically reduces the size of original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Manual Prints the original images onto one sheet of paper in the size specified in

Reduce/Enlarge.

Collated Sets whether to sort the copy job.

Margin Top/Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Left/Right Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

File Format Sets the file format to save the scanned image.

Color Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Resolution Sets the default scan resolution.

Document Size Sets the default document size.

Lighter/Darker Sets the default scan density level.

Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.

Margin Top/Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Left/Right Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

TIFF File Format Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.

Image Compression Sets the image compression level.

Max E-mail Size Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes.

The default is 2048 K bytes.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Print from USB Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own default settings for USB Direct Print.

Output Color

Purpose:

To specify whether to print in black and white or print in color.

Values:

Pages Per Side

Purpose:

To print two or four pages per sheet.

Values:

Auto Fit

Purpose:

To proportionally enlarge or reduce images when you print your documents stored in USB memory.

Values:

PDF Password

Purpose:

To enter the password when you print the secure PDF job.

Fax Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own default fax settings.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Full Color*

Black & White

Off* Prints one page per sheet.

2 Pages Per Side Prints two pages per sheet.

4 Pages Per Side Prints four pages per sheet.

Off Automatically reduces image when it is larger than the paper size. Prints as is when image is smaller than

the paper size.

Auto* Automatically enlarges or reduces image to fit the paper size.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Valu es:

Fax Settings

Purpose:

To configure the basic fax settings.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Valu es:

Resolution Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents

printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is

enabled only if the remote machine also supports the super fine resolution.

Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

Lighter/Darker Sets the default density level to be used for fax transmission.

Delayed Start Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.

Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the

handset of the external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.

Fax* Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the

time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically

receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal

speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.

Answer

Machine/

Fax

The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode,

the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones.

If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country (such as

Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland),

this mode is not supported.

DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a

distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone

company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for

faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that

specific ring pattern.

Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming

call.

Auto Receive Tel/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone

receives an incoming call.

Auto Receive Answer/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering

machine receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal

speaker until a connection is made.

Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through

the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Line Type Sets the line type.

Tone/Pulse Sets the dialing type.

Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy. If you

enter 0, the printer will not redial.

Redial Delay Specifies the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax

numbers registered in the Phone Book.

Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.

Remote Receive Tone Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.

Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Fax Header Name Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters

can be entered.

Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.

Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a service provided by some

telephone companies.

Sent Fax Forward Off Does not forward received faxes.

Forward Forwards incoming faxes to the fax number specified in Fax Forward Number

below without printing.

Print and

Forward

Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the fax number specified in Fax Forward

Number below.

E-mail only Forwards incoming faxes to the e-mail address specified in Forwarding E-mail

Address below without printing. The faxes are converted to a PDF file and sent

to the destination as an e-mail attachment.

E-mail and

Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the e-mail address specified in Forwarding

E-mail Address below. The faxes are converted to a PDF file and sent to the

destination as an e-mail attachment.

Forward to

Server

Forwards incoming faxes to the server specified in from Server Type through

Subdirectory Path (optional) below without printing. The faxes are converted

to a PDF file and stored in the destination.

Fwd to Server

and Print

Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the server specified in from Server Type

through Subdirectory Path (optional) below. The faxes are converted to a PDF

file and stored in the destination.

Fax Forward Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail Address Specifies the e-mail address of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.

Server Type Specifies the type of destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded. To forward to an FTP

server or a shared folder on a networked computer, select Server (FTP) or Computer (SMB)

respectively, and then specify the settings from Host Address (IP Address or DNS Name) through

Subdirectory Path (optional) below.

Host Address (IP Address or

DNS Name)

Enter the host name or IP address of an FTP server or a computer.

Port Number Enter the port number.

host)

Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP server.

Re-enter Password Re-enter your password.

Name of Shared Directory Enter the share name (Windows OS) or folder name (Macintosh OS) of the shared folder. You do

not need to specify this setting for an FTP server.

Subdirectory Path (optional) Leave blank if there is no second or third-level folder.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Printer Maintenance

This tab contains the Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Roller, Adjust Fusing Unit, Auto Registration Adjustment,

Color Registration Adjustment, Clean Developer, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, Clock

Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.

Paper Density

Purpose:

To specify the paper density.

Valu es:

Adjust Transfer Roller

Purpose:

To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller. To decrease the voltage, set negative

values. To increase the voltage, set positive values.

The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the printed paper, try to

increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the printed paper, try to decrease the voltage.

NOTE:

The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.

Prefix Dial Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Number Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number prioritizes over any auto dial number. It

is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Discard Size Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not

fit onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it

onto the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.

ECM Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the

ECM.

Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax

communications.

Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error

occurs.

Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or

only when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error

occurs.

Country Sets the country where the printer is used.

Plain Sets the paper density of plain paper.

Label Sets the paper density of labels.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Valu es:

Adjust Fusing Unit

Purpose:

To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To decrease the temperature, set

negative values. To increase the temperature, set positive values.

The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to

decrease the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.

NOTE:

The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.

Valu es:

Auto Registration Adjustment

Purpose:

To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.

Color Registration Adjustment

Purpose:

To manually adjust color registration.

Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to

a different location.

NOTE:

The Color Registration Adjustment feature can be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.

Plain Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Plain Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range

of -3 to 3.

Covers Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Label Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of -3 to 3.

Coated Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Recycled Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range

of -3 to 3.

Envelope Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.

Plain Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Plain Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Covers Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Label Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for labels within the range of -3 to 3.

Coated Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Recycled Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for recycled paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Envelope Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Values:

Clean Developer

Purpose:

To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge, to use up a toner cartridge when you need to

replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.

Valu es:

Adjust Altitude

Purpose:

To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are

performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.

NOTE:

An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Valu es:

Reset Defaults

Purpose:

To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) memory for system parameters and Address Book data. After executing

this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values.

Valu es:

Auto Correct Click Start to perform color registration adjustment.

Color Registration

Adjustment 1 (Lateral)

Specifies lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for Y

(Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan) within the range of -5 to +5.

Color Registration

Adjustment 2 (Process)

Specifies process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for LY (Left Yellow),

LM (Left Magenta), LC (Left Cyan), RY (Right Yellow), RM (Right Magenta), and RC (Right

Cyan) within the range of -5 to +5.

Clean Developer Click Start to stir the toner in the toner cartridge.

Yellow Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.

Magenta Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.

Cyan Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.

Black Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.

0 meter* Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

1000 meters

2000 meters

3000 meters

Reset Defaults User Fax

Section and Restart Printer

Click Start to initialize the system parameters.

Reset Defaults User Scan

Section and Restart Printer

Click Start to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.

Reset Defaults System

Section and Restart Printer

Click Start to initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Non-Dell Toner

Purpose:

To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

NOTE:

Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the

reliability of your printer. Dell recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty

coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.

NOTE:

Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart the printer.

Clock Settings

Purpose:

To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Valu es:

Web Link Customization

Purpose:

To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from

Order Supplies at:

in the left frame.

Valu es:

Print Server Settings

Use this menu to set the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for communications.

The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.

Print Server Reports

This tab contains the Print Server Setup Page and E-mail Alert Setup Page.

Print Server Setup Page

Displays the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports.

Date Format

yy/mm/dd Specifies the date format.

mm/dd/yy

dd/mm/yy

Time Format 12 Hour Clock Specifies the time format.

24 Hour Clock

Time Zone Specifies the time zone.

Set Date Specifies the current date.

Set Time Specifies the current time.

The default varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Select Reorder URL Select the Regular or Premier web address to be linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Regular Displays the regular web address (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to

Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Premier Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to

Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

E-mail Alert Setup Page

Displays the current settings of the e-mail server.

Print Server Settings

This tab contains the Basic Information, Port Settings, Wireless LAN, Wi-Fi Direct, TCP/IP, SNMP, SNTP,

Bonjour (mDNS), E-mail Alert, Scan to PC, Google Cloud Print, Proxy Server, AirPrint, and Reset Print Server

pages.

Basic Information

Purpose:

To configure the basic information of the printer.

NOTE:

The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed

Jobs page.

Valu es:

Port Settings

Purpose:

To enable or disable printing connectors and management protocol features.

NOTE:

The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or configure the

settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the new settings.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

System Settings Printer Name Specifies the name of the printer using up to 31 alphanumeric

characters.

Location Specifies the location of the printer using up to 63 alphanumeric

characters.

Contact Person Specifies the contact name, number, and other information of the

administrator and service center using up to 63 alphanumeric

characters.

Administrator E-mail

Address

Specifies the contact address of the administrator and service

center using up to 64 alphanumeric characters.

Asset Tag Number Enter the asset tag number for the printer.

EWS Settings Auto Refresh Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.

Auto Refresh Interval Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status

display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.

Web Page Title Specifies a web page title shown on the title bar of a web browser.

You can select either Internet Services or Printer Model - IP

Address as the title that users can see when they access the printer

via Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Valu es:

Wireless LAN

Purpose:

To configure wireless network settings.

To connect the printer to a wireless network, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.

NOTE:

Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Ethernet

Ethernet Settings Auto

Detects Ethernet transmission

rate and the duplex settings

automatically.

10Base-T Half-Duplex Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as

the default value.

10Base-T Full-Duplex Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as

the default value.

100Base-TX Half-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex

as the default value.

100Base-TX Full-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex

as the default value.

Current Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of Ethernet.

MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the printer.

Port Status LPD Specifies whether to enable LPD.

Port9100 Specifies whether to enable Port9100.

IPP Sets whether to enable IPP.

E-mail Alert Specifies whether to enable the E-mail Alert feature.

Bonjour (mDNS) Specifies whether to enable the Bonjour (mDNS) feature.

SNMP Specifies whether to enable the SNMP.

EWS Specifies whether to enable the Dell Printer Configuration Web

Tool.

WSD Specifies whether to enable the Web Services on Devices (WSD)

port.

SNTP Sets whether to enable SNTP.

Google Cloud Print Sets whether to enable Google Cloud Print.

This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Valu es:

Wireless Settings Wireless LAN Specifies whether to enable wireless connection.

SSID Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network using up to

32 alphanumeric characters.

Network Type Specifies the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure.

MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless network setting of the

printer.

Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless connection of the

printer.

Link Quality Displays the quality of the wireless network connection of the

printer.

Security Settings Encryption Select the security method from the list.

No Security

Specifies No Security to

configure the wireless setting

without specifying a security

method from WEP, WPA2-PSK

AES, and Mixed Mode PSK.

WEP 64 Bit ASCII (5 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 64 Bit ASCII

to use through the wireless

network.

WEP 128 Bit ASCII (13 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 128 Bit

ASCII to use through the

wireless network.

WEP 64 Bit Hex (10 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 64 Bit Hex to

use through the wireless

network.

WEP 128 Bit Hex (26 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 128 Bit Hex

to use through the wireless

network.

WPA2-PSK-AES

Specifies the WPA2-PSK AES to

use through the wireless

network.

Mixed Mode PSK Specifies the Mixed Mode PSK

to use through the wireless

network.

WEP Key 1 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 1 Enter the WEP key 1 again to confirm.

WEP Key 2 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 2 Enter the WEP key 2 again to confirm.

WEP Key 3 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 3 Enter the WEP key 3 again to confirm.

WEP Key 4 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 4 Enter the WEP key 4 again to confirm.

Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key type from the list.

Pass Phrase Specifies the passphrase.

Re-enter Pass Phrase Enter the passphrase again to confirm.

This item is available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network Type.

100

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Wi-Fi Direct

Purpose:

To configure the detailed setting of the Wi-Fi Direct connection.

Valu es:

TCP/IP

Purpose:

To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.

Valu es:

Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.

Group Role Sets the group role of the printer.

Device Name Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network

with up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting

the printer name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.

WPS Setup Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.

Group Owner Sets your printer as the group owner for Wi-Fi Direct.

SSID (Character string

following DIRECT)

Specifies a name to identify the Wi-Fi Direct network. Up to 32

alphanumeric characters can be entered. "DIRECT-" cannot be

changed.

Pass Phrase Displays the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase

into your Wi-Fi mobile device.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct adapter.

Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.

TCP/IP Settings Host Name Specifies the host name.

IP Mode Specifies the IP mode.

IPv4 IP Address Mode Selects the IP address mode.

Manual IP Address Manually sets the IP address.

Manual Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask.

Manual Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway

address.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

101

IPv6 Obtain address from DHCP Allows you to enable or disable

the automatic setting of the IP

address via DHCP.

Use Manual Address To set the IP address manually.

Manual Address Manually sets the IP address. To

specify an IPv6 address, enter the

address followed by a slash (/)

and then "64." For details,

consult your system

administrator.

Auto Statefull Address Displays the statefull address.

Stateless Address 1-3 Displays the stateless addresses.

Link Local Address Displays the link local address.

Manual Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway

address.

Auto Configure Gateway

Address

Displays the gateway address.

DNS DNS Domain Name Specifies the domain name of the domain name server. Up to 255

alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used. If you

need to specify more than one domain name, separate them using a

comma or semicolon.

IPv4 Get DNS Server Address from

DHCP

Specifies whether to get the

DNS server address

automatically from the DHCP

server.

Manual DNS Server Address Sets the DNS server address.

IPv6 Get DNS Server Address from

DHCPv6-lite

Select the check box to get the

DNS server address

automatically from the

DHCPv6-lite server.

Manual DNS Server Address Sets the DNS server address.

LPD Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.

IP Filter (IPv4) Specifies the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied

access to the printer.

Port9100 Port Number Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.

Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 1000 seconds.

IP Filter (IPv4) Specifies the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied

access to the printer.

HTTP Port Number Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between 8000 and 9999.

Simultaneous Connections Displays the maximum number of connections received

simultaneously by the client.

Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.

102

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

SNMP

Purpose:

To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.

Valu es:

SNMP v1/v2c

Purpose:

To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1/v2 protocol.

To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v1/v2 Properties in the SNMP page.

Valu es:

WSD Port Number Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between 8000 and 9999.

Receive Time-Out Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65535 seconds.

Notification Delivery Time-

Out

Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

Maximum Number of TTL Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.

Maximum Number of

Notification

Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.

SNMP Configuration Enable SNMP v1/v2c

Protocols

Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.

Edit SNMP v1/v2c

Properties

Click to display the SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of

SNMP v1/v2c protocol from the page.

Enable SNMP v3 Protocols Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.

Edit SNMP v3 Properties Click to display the SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP

v3 protocol from the page.

You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled.

Community Name Community Name (Read

only)

Sets the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31

alphanumeric characters.

The original setting will remain valid if no input is made.

Characters entered for community name in the previous settings

will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read Community

is public.

Re-enter Community Name

(Read only)

Enters the community name to access (read only) data again to

confirm it.

Community Name

(Read/Write)

Sets the community name to access (read and write) data using up

to 31 alphanumeric characters.

The original setting will remain valid if no input is made.

Characters entered for community name in the previous settings

will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read/Write

Community is private.

Re-enter Community Name

(Read/Write)

Enters the community name to access (read and write) data again

to confirm it.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

103

SNMP v3

Purpose:

To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.

To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page.

Valu es:

Community Name (Trap) Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric

characters.

The original setting will remain valid if no input is made.

Characters entered for Community Name (Trap) in the previous

settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Trap

Community is " " (NULL).

Re-enter Community Name

(Trap)

Enters the community name used for trap again to confirm it.

Trap Notification 1-4 Trap Address Type

Trap Address

Trap Notification (IP) Port

Number

Notify

Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case,

specify the IP address and IP socket in the following format:

IPv4

Specify the IP address and IP socket in the

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of "nnn" is a

variable value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-

254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket mmmmm

is a variable value between 0 and 65535.

IPv6

Specify the IP address and IP socket in the

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format. Each

section of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff.

IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535.

Authenticate Error Trap Select the check box to notify authentication error trapping.

Administrator Account Account Enabled Select the check box to enable the administrator account.

User Name Enters the user name of the administrator account.

Authentication Password

(8 - 32 Bytes)

Sets the authentication password of the administrator account

using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.

Confirm Authentication

Password (8 - 32 Bytes)

Confirms the set password.

Privacy Password

(8 - 32 Bytes)

Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to

32 alphanumeric characters.

Print Drivers / Remote

Client Account

Account Enabled Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client

account.

Reset to default Password Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client

account to default.

104

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

SNTP

Purpose:

To configure the SNTP server settings in order to perform time synchronization through SNTP.

Valu es:

Bonjour (mDNS)

Purpose:

To configure the detailed settings for Bonjour.

Values:

E-mail Alert

Purpose:

To configure settings for E-mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by clicking E-mail Alert in the left frame.

Valu es:

SNTP IP Address / Host Name Sets the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.

Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 120 seconds.

Time Synchronization

Interval

Sets the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.

Last Connection Time Displays the last date and time when your printer was connected to

the SNTP server.

Connection Status Displays the status of the connections between the SNTP server

and your printer.

Host Name Specifies the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash). The original setting will

remain valid if nothing is entered.

Printer Name Specifies the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets.

E-mail Server Settings Primary SMTP Gateway Sets the primary SMTP gateway.

SMTP Port Number Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be between 1 and

65535.

E-mail Send Authentication Specifies the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.

SMTP Login User Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters,

periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used.

SMTP Login Password Specifies the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric

characters.

Re-enter SMTP Login

Password

Enter the SMTP account password again to confirm.

POP3 Server Address Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address format of

"aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.

POP3 Port Number Specifies the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or

between 5000 and 65535.

POP User Name Specifies the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric

characters can be used.

POP User Password Specifies the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric

characters.

Re-enter POP User Password Enter the password again to confirm.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

105

Scan to PC

Purpose:

To specify the client when scanning data.

Valu es:

Google Cloud Print

Purpose:

To register the printer to Google Cloud Print.

Valu es:

Reply Address Designates the reply e-mail address for sent e-mails.

SMTP Server Connection Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.

E-mail Alert Settings E-mail List 1 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature using

up to 255 alphanumeric characters.

Select Alerts for List 1 Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an

e-mail alert for consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts Specifies whether to receive an

e-mail alert for paper handling

and/or service calls.

E-mail List 2 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature using

up to 255 alphanumeric characters.

Select Alerts for List 2 Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an

e-mail alert for consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts Specifies whether to receive an

e-mail alert for paper handling

and/or service calls.

FTP Client Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

SMB Client Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

Google Cloud Print*

(Registration state) Displays the Google Cloud Print registration state.

Google Cloud Print

Click to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.

Cancel Registration Click to cancel to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.

Available only when using IPv4.

106

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Proxy Server

Purpose:

To configure the proxy server settings.

Valu es:

AirPrint

Purpose:

To configure the detailed setting of AirPrint.

Valu es:

Reset Print Server

Purpose:

To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize the

NVM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.

Proxy Server Use Proxy Server Sets whether to enable the use of a proxy server.

Server Name Sets the name of the proxy server.

Port Number Sets the port number from 1 to 65535.

Authentication Sets whether to enable authentication.

Password Sets the login password for the proxy server.

Retype Password Confirms the set password.

AirPrint Turn On AirPrint Click to enable the printer for AirPrint.

Bonjour Name Specifies the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-"

(dash). The original setting will remain valid if nothing is entered.

Location Specifies the name of the location of the printer.

Latitude Specifies the latitude of the location where the printer is installed.

Longitude Specifies the longitude of the location where the printer is

installed.

IPP Authentication IPP Authentication Select the check box to enable the authentication feature for

AirPrint. If this check box is selected, you need to enter the user

name and password below when printing files via AirPrint.

User Name Enter the user name for AirPrint.

Password Enter the password corresponding to the above user name.

Retype Password Re-enter your password.

SSL/TLS SSL/TLS Click Settings to move to the SSL/TLS Server Communication

page. For details, see "Using Digital Certificates" on page 244.

Supply Levels Cyan Cartridge Level Displays the cyan toner level.

Magenta Cartridge Level Displays the magenta toner level.

Yellow Cartridge Level Displays the yellow toner level.

Black Cartridge Level Displays the black toner level.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

107

Valu es:

Security

This tab contains the Set Password, Authentication System, Kerberos Server, LDAP Server, LDAP Authentication,

LDAP User Mapping, SSL/TLS, IPsec, Display Network Settings, and IP Filter (IPv4) pages.

Set Password

Purpose:

To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer

Configuration Web Tool.

This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.

NOTE:

If you forgot your password, initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) to restore the password to the default (NULL). See

"Reset Print Server" on page 106.

NOTE:

When you change the password to lock the operator panel, set the password from Panel Lock in the Printer Settings

menu.

Valu es:

Authentication System

Purpose:

To specify the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search time-out.

Valu es:

Kerberos Server

Purpose:

To specify the settings for the Kerberos server.

Valu es:

Initialize NIC NVRAM

Memory and restart printer.

Click Start to initialize NVM. Network settings will revert to the factory default settings and

reboot the network capability.

Restart Printer Click Start to reboot the printer.

Administrator Password Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The password will appear as asterisks

(*) in the field when it is entered.

Re-enter Administrator

Password

Enter the password again to confirm.

Authentication Type (for

ColorTrack PRO)

Authentication System

Settings

Select the authentication system from the list. When the server

you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select Kerberos

(Windows) as the authentication method and specify the server

settings in "Kerberos Server" on page 107.

Optional Information Server Response Time-Out Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for response from

the server. Sets the time period from 1 to 75 seconds.

Search Time-Out Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for searching the

server. Sets the time period from 5 to 120 seconds.

Kerberos Server (for Server

Address/Phone Book)

IP Address / Host Name &

Port

Sets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port

address must be 88 or between 5000 and 65535.

Domain Name Enter the domain name.

108

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

LDAP Server

Purpose:

To specify the settings of the LDAP server.

Valu es:

LDAP Authentication

Purpose:

To specify the LDAP server authentication method.

Valu es:

LDAP User Mapping

Purpose:

To specify the settings of the LDAP user mapping.

Valu es:

Server Information

(for ColorTrack PRO)

IP Address / Host Name &

Port

Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port

address must be 389, 636, 3268, 3269, or between 5000 and 65535.

When LDAPS communication is required, set the port number to

636, and when you use the global catalog, set the port number to

3269.

LDAP Server Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.

Optional Information

(for Server Address/Phone

Book)

Search Directory Root Enter the search directory root.

LDAP Server

Select credential used to access the LDAP server.

Password Enter the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter Password Enter the login password again to confirm it.

Search Time-Out Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the

LDAP server. Select Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120

seconds.

Search Name Order Sets the search order.

Server Address Book Select the check box to enable you to search the e-mail addresses in

the LDAP server when sending e-mails from the printer.

Server Phone Book Select the check box to enable you to search the fax numbers in the

LDAP server when sending faxes from the printer.

LDAP Authentication (for

Server Address/Phone Book)

Authentication Method Shows the authentication method.

Use Added Text String Select whether to use the added text string from the list.

Text String Added to User

Name

Enter the added text string.

Common Name Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server.

Surname Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server.

Given Name Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server.

E-mail Address Sets the attribute type of the e-mail address set for the LDAP server.

Fax Phone Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP server.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

109

SSL/TLS

Purpose:

To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer, and set/delete the certificate used for

the communication between the printer and other devices such as an LDAP server.

Valu es:

SSL/TLS Server

Communication*

Select the check box to enable the SSL/TLS communication for when client computers access the

printer to view or change its settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or to print

files through AirPrint.

LDAP-SSL/TLS

Communication*

Select the check box to enable the SSL/TLS communication between the printer and an LDAP

server.

SMTP-SSL/TLS

Communication

Sets the type of SSL/TLS used to communicate with the SMTP server.

Create New Certificate Click to display the Generate Certificate page and to create a security certification from the page.

This button is available only when the self-signed certificate is not generated.

Public Key Method Select the public key method of the self-signed certificate.

Public Key Size Select the size of public key.

Issuer Sets the issuer of the self-signed certificate.

Validity Enters the valid days from 1 to 9999 days.

Generate Certificate Click to generate the self-signed certificate.

Certificate Signing Request

(CSR)

Click to display the Certificate Signing Request (CSR) page and to create a CSR from the page.

Digital Signature Algorithm Select the public key method.

Public Key Size Select the size of public key.

2 Digit Country Code

(Required)

Enter your country code.

State / Province Name (ST) Enter the name of state/region where your organization is located.

Locality Name (L) Enter the name of the city where your organization is located.

Organization Name (O)

(Required)

Enter your legal organization name.

Organization Unit (OU)

(Required)

Enter your division name.

Common Name (CN) Enter the fully-qualified domain name used for an SSL

communication.

E-mail Address Enter the e-mail address to contact your organization.

Upload Signed Certificate*

Click to display the Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the certificate file to the

printer from the page.

Password Enter the password to upload the certificate file.

Re-enter Password Enter the password again for confirmation.

File Name Click Browse to browse the file name to upload to the printer.

Import Click Import to upload the certificate file to the printer.

110

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

IPsec

Purpose:

To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted communication to the

printer.

Valu es:

NOTE:

If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the IPsec menu on the operator panel.

Certificate Management*

Click to display the Certificate Management page and to manage a security certification from the

page.

Category Displays the device to certificate.

Issued To Displays the device to certificate.

Issuer Displays the issuer to certificate.

Serial Number Displays the serial number of the device.

Public Key Method Displays the public key method.

Public Key Size Displays the size of public key.

Valid From Displays the time the certificate is valid.

Valid Unt il Displays the time the certificate is invalid.

Status Displays whether certificate is valid or not.

Certificate Purpose Displays the purpose of certificate.

Certificate Selection Status Displays the type of device certificate.

Delete Click to delete this certificate.

Delete All Certificates*

Click to delete all the certificates.

This item is available only when the self-signed certificate has been generated.

This item is effective only when connected via SSL/TLS (https). Only the administrator is allowed to display the pages.

IPsec Settings Protocol Select the check box to enable the protocol.

IKE Authentication Method Displays the type of authentication method used for IPsec.

Pre-Shared Key Sets a shared key. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and

hyphens can be used.

Re-enter Pre-Shared Key Enters the shared key again to confirm it.

IKE SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.

IPsec SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.

DH Group Sets the DH group.

PFS Select the check box to enable the PFS setting.

Remote peers IPv4 address Sets the IP address to connect to.

Remote peers IPv6 address Sets the IP address to connect to.

Non IPsec communication

policy

Allows communication with a device which does not support IPsec.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

111

Display Network Settings

Purpose:

To show or hide network information in the message field of the top menu screen.

Values:

IP Filter (IPv4)

Purpose:

To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.

Values:

Print Volume

Use this menu to verify the number of printed pages.

Valu es:

Address Book

This menu contains the Fax/E-mail and Server Address pages.

Fax/E-mail

This page contains the following subpages.

Show IPv4 Address* Shows the IPv4 address of the printer.

Show Host Name Shows the host name of the printer.

Hide Network Information Does not show network information.

Access List Displays the list of IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer.

Address Specifies the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value

between 0 and 255 in each field.

Address Mask Specifies the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric

value between 0 and 255 in each field.

Active Mode Accept Permits printing from specified network address.

Reject Rejects printing from specified network address.

Off* Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.

Printer Page Count Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.

Paper Used Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.

Address Book Allows you to view, edit, or create Address Book entries.

Fax Group Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.

E-mail Group Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.

E-mail Default Setup Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.

112

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Address Book - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the Address Book entries registered on the Address Book page.

Valu es:

Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the Address Book entries on the Address Book page, or create a new entry. The following items are in

the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the Address Book top page.

Valu es:

Address Book (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the address book entries registered on the Address Book page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the Address Book top page.

Valu es:

Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button.

ID:Name Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that user ID. IDs without an entry

show (Not in Use) in the Name column.

Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.

E-mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.

Delete Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.

Confirm/Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID.

Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID.

ID (Fax Speed Dial) Displays the selected user ID.

Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID, or enter a name for

the new entry.

Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the phone number of the user, or enter a phone number for the new

entry.

E-mail Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an e-mail address for the new

entry.

Delete Click this button to delete the entry for the user ID. This button is available only on the dialog

box for editing an existing entry.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

ID (Fax Speed Dial) Displays the selected user ID.

Name Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected user ID.

Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.

E-mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

113

FAX Group - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page.

Valu es:

FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are

in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the FAX Group top page.

Valu es:

FAX Group (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Group top page.

Valu es:

GroupID:Name Displays a fax group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in

the Name column.

Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm/Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.

Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.

FAX Group ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or

enter a new group name.

Fax Speed Dial Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of

speed dial codes indicated on the button.

ID:Name Displays a speed dial code and the names of an entry registered

under the speed dial code. Speed dial codes without an entry show

(Not in Use) in the Name column.

Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered

under the selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the

new entry.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

114

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

E-mail Group - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-mail Group page.

Valu es:

E-mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-mail Group page, or create a new entry. The following

items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the E-mail Group top page.

Valu es:

E-mail Group (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-mail Group page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the E-mail Group top page.

Valu es:

GroupID:Name Displays a group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the

Name column.

Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm/Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.

Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.

E-mail Group ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or

enter a new group name.

E-mail Address Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs

indicated on the button.

ID:Name Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that

user ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name

column.

Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered

under the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new

entry.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

115

E-mail Default Setup

Purpose:

To set the default e-mail subject and message.

Valu es:

Server Address

Server Address - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.

Valu es:

Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are

in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the Server Address top page.

Valu es:

Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject. Up to 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Body Text Allows you to enter the default e-mail message. Up to 200 alphanumeric characters can be

entered.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.

ID:Name Displays a server ID and the name of a file directory registered under that server ID. IDs without

an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.

Server Address Displays the address of the file directory.

Delete Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.

Confirm/Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID.

Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID.

ID Displays the selected server ID.

Name Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID, or enter a new server

name.

Server Type FTP Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol.

SMB Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server Message

Block (SMB) protocol.

Server Address Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID, or enter a new server

address.

Share Name Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new shared name, when Server

Type is set to SMB.

Server Path Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new path.

Server Port Number Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a new port number. If you

leave the text box blank, the default port number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.

a new login name.

116

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Server Address (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address top page.

Valu es:

Tray Settings

Use this menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

Valu es:

new password.

Re-enter Password Enter the password again to confirm.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

ID Displays the selected server ID.

Name Displays the name assigned for the server ID.

Server Address Displays the server address registered under the server ID.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

MPF Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

MPF Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

MPF Custom Size - Y Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

MPF Custom Size - X Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

Display Popup Sets whether to display a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when

paper is loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Understanding the Printer Menus

117

Understanding the Printer Menus

When your printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of users, the access to the administrator

menu should be limited. This prevents unauthorized users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change

the default menu settings that have been set by the administrator. However, you can select settings for individual

print jobs using the printer driver. Print settings selected from the printer driver have precedence over the default

menu settings selected from the operator panel.

Defaults Settings

Use this menu to configure the default copy, scan, and fax settings of the printer.

Copy Defaults

Use this menu to configure a variety of copy features.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Color

Purpose:

To set whether to make copies in color or in black and white.

Values:

Collated

Purpose:

To sort the copy job.

Values:

Reduce/Enlarge

Purpose:

To set the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.

Black & White Prints in black and white mode.

Color* Prints in color mode.

Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job.

Collated Sorts the copy job.

Auto Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job.

118

Understanding the Printer Menus

Values:

mm series

inch series

NOTE:

You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25% to 400%, or press to enlarge the zoom

ratio or press to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.

NOTE:

This item is available only when

Multiple-Up

is set to

Off

Manual

Document Size

Purpose:

To specify the default document size.

Values:

200%

A5->A4(141%)

A5->B5(122%)

100%*

B5->A5(81%)

A4->A5(70%)

50%

200%

Stmt->Lgl(154%)

Stmt->Ltr(129%)

100%

Lgl->Ltr (78%)

Ldgr->Ltr(64%)

50%

A4 (210 x 297 mm)

A5 (148 x 210 mm)

B5 (182 x 257 mm)

Letter (8.5 x 11")

Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")

Executive (7.25 x 10.5")

The default varies depending on

country-specific factory default.

Understanding the Printer Menus

119

Original Type

Purpose:

To select the copy image quality.

Values:

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:

To set the default copy density level.

Values:

Sharpness

Purpose:

To set the default sharpness level.

Values:

Auto Exposure

Purpose:

To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Values:

Text Suitable for documents with text.

Text & Phot o* Suitable for documents with both text and photos/gray tones.

Photo Suitable for documents with photos.

Lighter2 Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1

Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharper

Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Softer Makes the copy softer than the original.

Softest

Off Does not suppress the background.

On* Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

120

Understanding the Printer Menus

Color Balance R

Purpose:

To specify the default color balance level of red within the range of -2 to +2.

Color Balance G

Purpose:

To specify the default color balance level of green within the range of -2 to +2.

Color Balance B

Purpose:

To specify the default color balance level of blue within the range of -2 to +2.

Gray Balance

Purpose:

To specify the default gray balance level within the range of -2 to +2.

Multiple-Up

Purpose:

To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Values:

Margin Top/Bottom

Purpose:

To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.

Values:

Margin Left/Right

Purpose:

To specify the value of the left and right margins.

Values:

Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto Automatically reduces the size of original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Manual Prints the original images onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in

Reduce/Enlarge

4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Understanding the Printer Menus

121

Margin Middle

Purpose:

To specify the value of the middle margin.

Values:

Scan Defaults

Use this menu to configure a variety of scanner features.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

File Format

Purpose:

To specify the file format to save the scanned image.

Values:

Color

Purpose:

To set whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Values:

Color Button Set

Purpose:

To assign color mode to the color mode switch button.

Values:

Resolution

Purpose:

To specify the default scan resolution.

0 mm*/0.0 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

PDF*

MultiPageTIFF

TIFF

JPEG

Black & White Scans in black and white mode.

Color* Scans in color mode.

B&W Button Black & White* Scans in black and white when Black & White is selected for a color mode.

Grayscale Scans in grayscale when Black & White is selected for a color mode.

Color Button Color* Scans in color when Color is selected for a color mode.

Color(Photo) Scans in color (Photo) when Color is selected for a color mode. This is suitable

for photographic images.

122

Understanding the Printer Menus

Values:

Document Size

Purpose:

To specify the default document size.

Values:

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:

To set the default scan density level.

Values:

Sharpness

Purpose:

To set the default sharpness level.

Values:

200 x 200 dpi*

300 x 300 dpi

400 x 400 dpi

600 x 600 dpi

A4 (210 x 297 mm)

A5 (148 x 210 mm)

B5 (182 x 257 mm)

Letter (8.5 x 11")

Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")

Executive (7.25 x 10.5")

The default varies depending on

country-specific factory default.

Lighter2 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1

Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Sharpest Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Sharper

Normal* Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.

Softer Makes the scanned image softer than the original.

Softest

Understanding the Printer Menus

123

Auto Exposure

Purpose:

To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.

Values:

Margin Top/Bottom

Purpose:

To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.

Values:

Margin Left/Right

Purpose:

To specify the value of the left and right margins.

Values:

Margin Middle

Purpose:

To specify the value of the middle margin.

Values:

TIFF File Format

Purpose:

To specify the default TIFF file format.

Values:

Off Does not suppress the background.

On* Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.

2 mm*/0.1 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

2 mm*/0.1 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

0 mm*/0.0 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

TIFF V6

Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6.

TTN2 Sets the default Tiff file format to TTN2.

124

Understanding the Printer Menus

Image Compression

Purpose:

To specify the image compression level.

Values:

Max E-mail Size

Purpose:

To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default

is 2048 K bytes.

File Naming Mode

Purpose:

To specify the details of File Naming Mode.

Values:

Create Folder

Purpose:

To specify whether to create a folder when saving scanned images.

Values:

NOTE:

This feature is available only for Scan to USB or Scan to Network.

Prefix/Suffix String

Purpose:

To specify the texts to be added.

NOTE:

This is available only when

File Naming Mode

is set to

Add Prefix

Add Suffix

Fax Defaults

Use this menu to configure a variety of fax features.

NOTE:

The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under

Country

. If

Country

is not set up, a

message

Set The Country Code

appears on the display.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

High Sets the image compression level to

High

Medium* Sets the image compression level to

Medium

Low Sets the image compression level to

Low

Auto* Sets the default file name.

Add Prefix Adds texts in front of the file name.

Add Suffix Adds texts after the file name.

Off Does not create a folder when saving a scanned image.

On* Creates a folder when saving a scanned image.

Understanding the Printer Menus

125

Resolution

Purpose:

To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.

Values:

NOTE:

Faxes scanned in the

Super Fine

mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.

Original Type

Purpose:

To select the default document type.

Values:

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:

To set the default copy density level.

Values:

Delayed Start

Purpose:

To set a specific time for the fax transmission to start. Once this setting is activated, your printer stores all of the

documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time. After faxing is complete, the data in

the memory is cleared.

Values:

NOTE:

A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer.

Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix

printer.

Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The

Super Fine

mode is enabled only if the

remote machine also supports the super fine resolution. See the notes below.

Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

Text * Suitable for documents with text.

Photo Suitable for documents with photos.

Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1

Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

21:00*/PM9:00* Specifies the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.

0:00 - 23:59 /

AM/PM1:00 - 12:59

126

Understanding the Printer Menus

Print from USB Defaults

Output Color

Purpose:

To specify whether to print in black and white or print in color.

Values:

Pages Per Side

Purpose:

To print two or four pages per sheet.

Values:

Auto Fit

Purpose:

To proportionally enlarge or reduce images when you print your documents stored in USB memory.

Values:

PDF Password

Purpose:

To enter the password when you print the secure PDF job.

Tray Settings

Use this menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Full Color*

Black & White

Off* Prints one page per sheet.

2 Pages Per Side Prints two pages per sheet.

4 Pages Per Side Prints four pages per sheet.

Off Automatically reduces image when it is larger than the paper size. Prints as is when image is smaller than

the paper size.

Auto* Automatically enlarges or reduces image to fit the paper size.

Understanding the Printer Menus

127

MPF

Purpose:

To specify the paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

Values:

NOTE:

For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 166.

Paper Size A4 (210 x 297 mm)

A5 (148 x 210 mm)

B5 (182 x 257 mm)

Letter (8.5 x 11")

Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")

Executive (7.25 x 10.5")

Envelope #10 (4.1 x 9.5")

Monarch Env. (3.9 x 7.5")

Monarch Env. L (7.5 x 3.9")

DL Env. (110 x 220 mm)

DL Env. L (220 x 110 mm)

C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm)

Custom Size Portrait(Y) 297 mm

/11.7 inch

Specifies the length of the custom size

paper.

Available Range:

127-355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches

Landscape(X) 210 mm

/8.3 inch

Specifies the width of the custom size

paper.

Available Range:

77-215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches

Paper Type Plain*

Plain Thick

Covers

Coated

Label

Recycled

Envelope

Plain S2

Plain Thick S2

Covers S2

Coated S2

Recycled S2

Display Popup Off Does not display a popup menu.

On* Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when paper is

loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

The default varies depending on country-specific factory default.

128

Understanding the Printer Menus

Report/List

Use this menu to print various types of reports and lists.

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Report / List

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case,

enter the password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

System Settings

Purpose:

To print a list of the information such as the printer name, serial number, print volume, and the network settings.

Panel Settings

Purpose:

To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.

PCL Fonts List

Purpose:

To print a sample of the available PCL fonts.

PS Fonts List

Purpose:

To print a sample of the available PS fonts.

Job History

Purpose:

To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 50 jobs.

Error History

Purpose:

To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.

Color Test Page

Purpose:

To print a page for testing colors.

Protocol Monitor

Purpose:

To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.

Address Book

Purpose:

To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.

Fax Activity

Purpose:

To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.

Understanding the Printer Menus

129

Stored Documents List

NOTE:

Stored Documents feature is available only when

RAM Disk

under

System Settings

is enabled.

Purpose:

To print a list of all files stored for Secure Print in the RAM disk.

Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Report / List

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired report or list is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The selected report or list is printed.

Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box

Click

Start



All Programs



Dell Printers



Dell Printer Hub

Dell Printer Hub opens.

Select

Dell Color MFP E525w

print driver at

My Printers

Click on the link

Tool Box

from list at the left side of the page.

NOTE:

The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this

case, click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name.

The

Tool Box

opens.

Click the

System Settings

tab.

Select

Printer Information and Settings

from the list at the left side of the page, and click

Reports

button on the

page.

The

Reports

page is displayed.

Click the button for the desired report or list.

The report or list is printed.

Admin Menu

Use this menu to configure a variety of printer features.

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Phone Book

Use this menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.

Speed Dial

Purpose:

To store up to 99 frequently called numbers in speed dial locations.

Recommended Paper

To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use dry 75 g/m

(20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper

designed for general business use also provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper having resistance to high

temperature, and without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats

paper to high temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have

chosen is acceptable for laser printers.

NOTE:

Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When choosing any print media,

you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.

Unacceptable Paper

The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless

copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

• Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

• Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit

• Preprinted paper that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such

as optical character recognition (OCR) forms

In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.

• Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, thermal paper

• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper

• Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309

• Multiple-part forms or documents

• Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.

• Moist paper that may cause wrinkle

Print Media Guidelines

163

Selecting Paper

Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.

To help avoid jams or poor print quality:

• Always use new, dry, and undamaged paper.

• Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated

on the paper package.

• Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.

• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.

• Do not remove the standard 150 sheet tray while a job is printing.

• Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

• Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead

When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the printer:

• Use grain long paper for best results.

• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.

• Select paper that absorb ink, but do not bleed.

• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

• Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copying machines. The ink must

withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set or

oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Printing on Letterhead

Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed letterhead you have selected is

acceptable for laser printers.

Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following illustration for help when loading

letterhead in the print media sources.

164

Print Media Guidelines

Loading Letterhead

Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the

printer first.

Selecting Pre-punched Paper

Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in manufacturing techniques.

However, it may not be possible to print on the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper.

To select and use pre-punched paper:

• Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper.

• Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled

paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.

• Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent

cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.

• Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.

Envelopes

Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of light wrinkling. Before buying large

quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first. See "Loading Print Media in the

Standard 150 Sheet Tray" on page 168 for instructions on loading an envelope.

When printing on envelopes:

• Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.

• Set the print media source to standard 150 sheet tray. Set the paper type to

Envelope

, and select the correct size of

envelope from the printer driver.

• For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m

(20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m

(28 lb

bond) weight for the envelope tray as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Envelopes with 100% cotton

content must not exceed 90 g/m

(24 lb bond) weight.

• Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.

• Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or

releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the

envelope supplier.

• Adjust the width guides and the length guide to fit the width of the envelopes.

Print Media Guidelines

165

• To load envelope in standard 150 sheet tray, the print side must be facing up.

• See

"Loading Envelopes

" on page 171 for instructions on loading an envelope.

• Use one envelope size during a print job.

• Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%) and the high printing temperatures may

seal the envelopes.

• For best performance, do not use envelopes that:

– Have excessive curl or twist

– Are stuck together or damaged in any way

– Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing

– Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars

– Have an interlocking design

– Have postage stamps attached

– Have nicked edges or bent corners

– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

Labels

Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.

When selecting labels:

• Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205°C

(401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).

• Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

• Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.

CAUTION:

Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.

When printing on labels:

• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or

releasing hazardous emissions.

• Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.

• Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray.

• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.

• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the

label.

• Do not print a label through the printer more than once.

• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.

• Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.

• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.

• Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the

adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and

could void your warranty.

WARNING:

Otherwise a jam occurs in the printer and contaminate your printer and your cartridges with adhesive. As a result,

could void your printer and cartridge warranties.

166

Print Media Guidelines

Storing Print Media

For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media feeding problems and uneven print

quality.

• For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the

relative humidity is 40%.

• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.

• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so

that the edges do not buckle or curl.

• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Identifying Print Media and Specifications

This section provides information on supported paper sizes, types, and specification.

Supported Paper Sizes

• A4 (210 x 297 mm)

• B5 (182 x 257 mm)

• A5 (148 x 210 mm)

• C5 (162 x 229 mm)

• Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 in)*

• Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 in)

• DL (110 x 220 mm)*

•Letter (8.5 x 11 in)

•Legal (8.5 x 14 in)

• Folio (8.5 x 13 in)

• Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in)

•Custom*

You can place the originals in a long-edge feed direction or in a short-edge feed direction. For details about long-edge or short-edge

feed direction, see "Loading Envelopes" on page 171.

Custom width: 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)

Custom length: 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)

On Windows Vista

/Server

2008/Server

2008 R2/Server

2012, only the administrator can set and modify the custom paper size from

the printer driver.

Print Media Guidelines

167

Supported Paper Types

•Plain*

•Plain Side 2

• Plain Thick

• Plain Thick Side 2

•Recycled

• Recycled Side 2

•Label

•Covers

•Covers Side 2

•Envelope

•Coated

•Coated Side 2

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Paper Type Specifications

Paper type Weight (g/m

)Remarks

Plain Paper 60-90 -

Plain Thick Paper 91-105 -

Covers 106-163 -

Coated 106-163 Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.

Label - Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.

Envelope - -

Recycled 60-105 -

168

Loading Print Media

Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.

Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually

indicated on the print media package.

NOTE:

After loading paper in the standard 150 sheet tray, specify the same paper type and paper size on the operator panel.

Capacity

Standard 150 sheet tray can hold:

• 150 sheets of standard paper

• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of thick paper

• One sheet of coated paper

• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of post cards

• Five envelopes

• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of labels

Print Media Dimensions

Standard 150 sheet tray accept print media within the following dimensions:

• Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)

• Length — 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)

Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray

NOTE:

To avoid paper jams, do not remove the standard 150 sheet tray while printing.

NOTE:

Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.

Hold the tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Loading Print Media

169

Open the dust cover, and adjust the paper guides.

NOTE:

When loading legal size or user-specified print media, slide the extendable part of the tray while pinching the lever.

Before loading the print media, flex the sheets and fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.

NOTE:

Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.

NOTE:

When loading coated paper, load one sheet at a time.

170

Loading Print Media

Align the width guides and length guide against the edges of the print media.

After confirming that the guides are adjusted and secured, close the dust cover and insert the tray into the printer.

Inserting back the tray displays the message on the LCD panel prompting you to specify the paper size in the tray.

Press the button until the appropriate paper size is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

) button.

Press the button until the appropriate paper type is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

) button.

Loading Print Media

171

Loading Envelopes

NOTE:

When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the printer driver. If not specified, the print

image will be rotated 180 degrees.

NOTE:

If you do not load envelopes in the standard 150 sheet tray right after they have been removed from the packaging, they

may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten the envelops before loading. And then, firmly press down on the entire surface of the envelops

as shown below.

NOTE:

You can load up to 5 envelopes at a time.

When Loading Envelope #10, DL, or Monarch

Load envelopes with the flaps closed. Place the print side facing up, and the flaps come at the right when you face

towards the printer.

172

Loading Print Media

To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to be loaded with the flaps opened. Place

the print side facing up, and the flaps come at the bottom when you face towards the printer.

When Loading C5

Load envelopes with the flaps opened. Place the print side facing up, and the flaps come at the bottom when you

face towards the printer.

CAUTION:

Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the

printer.

Loading Print Media

173

NOTE:

If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the following

illustration.

The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.

NOTE:

To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes, see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper

Setup Navigator on the printer driver.

Loading Letterhead

Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the

printer first.

174

Loading Print Media

Loading Print Media When Manual Duplex Printing

NOTE:

When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then load it in the standard 150 sheet tray.

NOTE:

You can specify the settings required for manual duplex printing on the printer driver.

NOTE:

PS printer driver does not support manual duplex printing.

When you start manual duplex printing, the instruction window appears. Note that the window cannot be reopened

once it is closed. Do not close the window until duplex printing is complete.

Use the printer driver to start printing your documents.

Even pages of document are printed first.

For a six page document, it is printed in the order of page 6, page 4, and then page 2.

Ready / Error LED blinks and the message appears on the operator panel when the printing of even pages is

complete.

Remove the printed paper from the center output tray.

Load the printed paper with the blank side facing up into the standard 150 sheet tray.

The document is printed in the order of page 1, page 3, and then page 5.

NOTE:

Warped or curled printed paper may cause paper jams. Straighten them before loading them.

NOTE:

Manual duplex printing is not enabled if document consists of various sizes of paper.

Loading Print Media

175

Using the Output Tray Extension

The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling from the printer after the print job is

complete.

Before printing a document, ensure that the output tray extension is fully extended.

NOTE:

When you pull out envelopes or small size print media, lift up the scanner unit.

176

Printing, Copying, Scanning,

and Faxing

17 Printing........................................................................................ 177

18 Copying ....................................................................................... 189

19 Scanning..................................................................................... 200

20 Faxing.......................................................................................... 221

Printing

177

Printing

This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain lists of information from your printer, and how to cancel a

job.

Tips for Successful Printing

Tips on Storing Print Media

Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media" on page 166.

Avoiding Paper Jams

NOTE:

It is recommended that you try a limited sample of any print media you are considering using with the printer before

purchasing large quantities.

By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid paper jams. See the following instructions

on loading print media:

• "Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray" on page 168

• "Avoiding Jams" on page 276

If you experience a jam, see "Jam" on page 300 for instructions.

Sending a Job to Print

Install the printer driver to use all the features of the printer. When you choose Print from an application, a window

representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job you are sending to print.

Print settings selected from the driver have precedence over the default menu settings selected from the operator

panel or Tool Box.

You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all the available system settings you can change. If

you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.

To print a job from a typical Microsoft

Windows

application:

Open the file you want to print.

From the

File

menu, select

Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the system settings as needed (such as the pages

you want to print or the number of copies).

To adjust system settings not available from the first screen, such as Quality, Paper Size, or Image Orientation, click

Preferences

The

Printing Preferences

dialog box appears.

Specify the print settings. For more information, click

Help

Click

to close the

Printing Preferences

dialog box.

Click

to send the job to the selected printer.

178

Printing

Canceling a Print Job

There are several methods for canceling a print job.

Canceling From the Operator Panel

To cancel a job after it has started printing:

Press the

(Cancel)

button.

NOTE:

Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.

Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows

Canceling a Job From the Taskbar

When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.

Double-click the printer icon.

A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.

Select the job you want to cancel.

Press <Delete> on the keyboard.

Canceling a Job From the Desktop

Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.

Click

Start



Devices and Printers

(for Windows

7 and Windows Server

2008 R2).

Click

Start



Printers and Faxes

(for Windows Server

2003).

Click

Start



Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Printers

(for Windows Vista

and Windows Server

2008).

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel



Hardware and Sound



Devices and Printers

(for Windows

8 and Windows

8.1).

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel



Hardware



Devices and Printers

(for Windows Server

2012 and Windows Server

2012 R2).

A list of available printers appears.

Right-click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for print, and then select

See what's printing

Select the printer driver.

A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.

Select the job you want to cancel.

Press <Delete> on the keyboard.

Printing

179

Using the Secure Print Feature

You can store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with the password can print them from the

operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents.

NOTE:

The Secure Print feature is available only when

RAM Disk

under

System Settings

is enabled.

NOTE:

If a print job is too large for the memory available, the printer may display an error message.

NOTE:

The Secure Print feature is available when using the PCL or PostScript 3 Compatible driver.

Procedures for Secure Print

When you send a job to the printer, you can specify the information such as user ID, password, and job name in the

printer driver to store the job in the memory. When you are ready to print the job, select the desired job name in the

memory using the operator panel.

The following are procedures for storing and printing jobs.

Storing Print Jobs

To use the Secure Print feature, select Secure Print for Job Type and specify the User ID, Password and Document

Name by clicking Setting in the General or Paper/Output tab of the print driver.

NOTE:

If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the printer driver, the job name will be identified using the time and

date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name.

Printing the Stored Jobs

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

Job Status

is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

) button.

Press the button until

Print Menu

is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

) button.

Select

Secure Print

, and then press the (

Set

) button.

Press the button until the user name that you specified in the print driver is highlighted, and then press the

(

Set

) button.

Enter the password that you specified in the print driver using the numeric keypad, and then press the (

Set

)

button.

The password appears as a series of asterisks (*******) to ensure confidentiality.

The list of stored documents appears.

NOTE:

When you enter an invalid password, the message

Wrong Password

appears. Press the

(Set) button or

(Back) button to return to the screen for entering the password.

Press the button until the document that you want to print is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

)

button.

Send confidential data.

Enter the password from

the operator panel.

Print data.

Confidential

180

Printing

Press the button until

is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

) button.

NOTE:

When you delete the document in the memory, press the button until

Delete

is highlighted, and then press

the (Set) button.

NOTE:

You can set the number of copies for printing in the print driver.

Deleting Stored Jobs

A job that has been stored will be deleted after printing. You can also select the menu on the operator panel to delete

the stored job before printing.

NOTE:

All the jobs in the memory are cleared when the printer is turned off.

Direct Print Using the USB Memory (USB Direct Print)

This feature allows you to print files stored in a USB memory using the operator panel.

NOTE:

Connecting devices other than USB memory to the USB port of the printer may cause damage to your printer.

NOTE:

Do not remove the USB memory from the USB port until the printer has finished printing.

NOTE:

If the Function Enabled setting for

USB-Print

is set to

On(Password)

, you need to enter the four digit password

to use the print function. If the Function Enabled setting for

USB-Print

is set to

Off

, the print function is disabled. For

details, see "Function Enabled" on page 158.

Supported File Formats

The following file types can be printed directly from a USB memory.

•PDF

• MultiPageTIFF

• TIFF (single page only)

•JPEG

Printing a File in a USB Memory

Insert a USB memory to the USB port of the printer.

NOTE:

Ensure that the data in the USB memory was created by this printer using scan features.

Press the button until

Print From

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select Document

appears.

Printing

181

You can also print a file by the following steps.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Ensure that

Print From USB Memory

is highlighted, and then press the (

Set

) button.

Press the button until the desired file is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select printing options as required.

Ensure that

Start Print

is highlighted, and then press the (

Start

) button.

NOTE:

Before removing the USB memory, ensure that the printer is not accessing the USB memory. If you remove the USB

memory while the printer is accessing, the data in the USB memory or the USB memory itself may be damaged.

Printing With Wi-Fi Direct

This section provides information for Wi-Fi Direct printing. Wi-Fi Direct allows your Wi-Fi mobile devices such as

computers, smart phone, and tablets, to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you

can print documents, photos, or e-mail on your Wi-Fi mobile devices directly without a wireless access point.

NOTE:

Wi-Fi Direct is available even if the printer is connected to your wireless network connection.

NOTE:

Only printing function is available via the Wi-Fi Direct network.

NOTE:

You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the Wi-Fi Direct network of the printer.

NOTE:

The maximum number of devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is one.

NOTE:

Depending on the device, the channel used to connect the device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct may differ from the

channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection with

Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi infrastructure mode may not work properly.

NOTE:

The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols; LPD, Port9100, Web Services on Devices

(WSD) (print), Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c/v3, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

NOTE:

Wi-Fi Direct network does not support IPv6.

Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct

To use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to first set up the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the operator panel of the printer. To

connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct, you need to operate the mobile device to establish

connection.

Setting Up the Printer

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Wi-Fi Direct Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Wi-Fi Direct

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select

Enable

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

When you use a Wi-Fi Direct-certified device (including device with the Wi-Fi Direct PIN function), proceed to

step 11.

When you use a device that is not Wi-Fi Direct certified, or a device with WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™-

Push Button Configuration)/WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number), proceed to step

182

Printing

NOTE:

To setup the wireless network using WPS:

Press the button until

WPS Method

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select

Push Button Configuration

for WPS-PBC or

PIN Code

for WPS-PIN.

Press the button until

Group Role

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Group Owner

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Device Name

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the printer name for searching your printer on a wireless network.

Press the button until

Connection Status

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that no other device is connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network.

NOTE:

When other device is connected (the device name is displayed on the screen), you cannot use the Wi-Fi Direct

connection. Disconnect the other device from the Wi-Fi Direct network. For details, see "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct

Network" on page 183.

Reboot the printer after you complete the Wi-Fi Direct settings. After the reboot, repeat steps from 1 to 5.

Press the button until

SSID

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the network name of your wireless network.

Press the button until

PassPhrase

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the passphrase.

The printer is ready to use the Wi-Fi Direct connection.

NOTE:

To confirm the SSID and passphrase, you can print the list by selecting

Print Passphrase

on the

PassPhrase

screen.

Connecting the Mobile Device

Connect the mobile device to the Wi-Fi Direct network.

For Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows

RT, and Windows

RT 8.1

Ta p

Settings

in the

PC settings

menu.

Tap the Wi-Fi icon.

Tap the printer SSID, and then tap

Connect

Enter the passphrase, and then tap

The mobile device will connect to the printer.

For Windows

Click on the network icon on the taskbar.

Click the printer SSID, and then click

Connect

Enter the passphrase, and then click

Click

Cancel

to exit the

Set Network Location

window.

The mobile device will connect to the printer.

Printing

183

For Windows Vista

Click

Start



Connect To

Click the printer SSID.

Enter the passphrase, and then click

Connect

The mobile device will connect to the printer.

For iOS

Ta p

Settings



Wi-Fi

Tap the printer SSID.

Enter the passphrase, and then tap

Join

The mobile device will connect to the printer.

For Android™

The procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the manual provided with your

mobile device.

Install the printer on the mobile device.

For Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows

RT, and Windows

RT 8.1

Ta p

Devices

in the

PC settings

menu.

Ta p

Add a device

in the

Devices

sub-menu.

Ta p

Dell_xxxxxx

The printer is ready for use.

For Windows Vista

, and Windows

You need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. See "Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running

Windows

" on page 49.

For iOS

You need to install the printing application such as Mobile Print App for Dell, and then the printer is ready for use.

For Android

You need to install the printing application such as Dell Mobile Print, and then the printer is ready for use.

Printing via Wi-Fi Direct

The printing procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the manual provided with

your mobile device to print as you normally do from the device.

Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Wi-Fi Direct Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Connection Status

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select the device name to disconnect.

184

Printing

Select

Disconnect

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The selected device is successfully disconnected.

Resetting the Passphrase

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Wi-Fi Direct Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Connection Status

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select the device name to reset the passphrase.

Select

Reset Passphrase

and

Start

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset.

You can also reset the passphrase by the following steps.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Wi-Fi Direct Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

PassPhrase

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select

Reset Passphrase

and

Start

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset.

Resetting the PIN Code

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Wi-Fi Direct Setup

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

PIN Code

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select

Reset PIN Code

The PIN code is reset.

Printing

185

Mobile Printing

The printer supports printing from a variety of mobile devices.

Android OS

Download the Dell Document Hub app for free from Google Play. Easy to use and navigate, the Dell Document

Hub app enables direct printing of photos, documents web content and more, to supported Dell printers on a Wi-Fi,

Wi-Fi Direct, or Ethernet network.

Scan the QR Code for quick access to the relevant application store.

Apple iOS

This printer is compatible with AirPrint. For details about AirPrint, see "Printing With AirPrint" on page 185. This

printer is also compatible with Dell Document Hub App, available for free download from App Store.

Scan the QR Code for quick access to the relevant application store.

Printing With AirPrint

This section provides information for printing with AirPrint. AirPrint allows you to print through a

network with iPad (all models), iPhone (3GS or later), and iPod touch (3rd generation or later) running

the latest version of iOS. AirPrint also allows you to accomplish basic network printing with Macintosh

(OS X 10.7 or later) without installing additional drivers.

Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer

To use AirPrint, Bonjour (mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your printer. Make sure that Bonjour(mDNS)

and IPP are set to Enable on the operator panel menu. For details, see "Protocol" on page 141. Bonjour(mDNS)

and IPP can also be enabled by selecting Enable AirPrint check box from the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web

Tool . Follow the procedure below to configure the environment settings for AirPrint using the Dell Printer

Configuration Web Tool.

Ensure that the printer is connected to the network.

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75 and "Starting the Dell

Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 76.

For Android OS

For Apple iOS

186

Printing

In the navigation panel, scroll down to

Print Server Settings

and click

AirPrint

Click

Turn On AirPrint

in the

Enable AirPrint

field.

The printer is ready for AirPrint.

NOTE:

If the Enable AirPrint check box is not active, it means that both

Bonjour (mDNS)

and

IPP

are already set to

Enable

on the operator panel menu and the printer is ready for AirPrint.

Printing via AirPrint

The following procedure uses the iPhone running iOS8.1 as an example.

Open your e-mail, photo, web page, or document you want to print.

Tap the action icon

Ta p

Select your printer and set printer options.

Ta p

Printing With Google Cloud Print™

This section provides information for Google Cloud Print service with your smart phone, tablet, or any other device.

By registering the printer to your Google

account, you can use the Google Cloud Print service to print from

various devices connected to the Internet. You can print documents, photos or e-mails using the Google Chrome

browser or applications such as Google Drive

on your mobile device. For more information about Google Cloud

Print, visit the Google web site.

Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud Print

To use Google Cloud Print, you need to prepare the following in advance:

• Connect the printer to a network that has access to the Internet.

NOTE:

Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection.

NOTE:

If the printer is connected to a network that uses a proxy server, you need to specify the settings in Proxy Server

from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more information, see "Proxy Server" on page 106.

• Acquire a Google account and a Gmail

address.

•Set

Google Cloud Print

Enable

from the operator panel menu, or set

Google Cloud Print

from

the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

When using the operator panel

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Network

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Protocol

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Google Cloud Print

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Select

Enable

Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.

Printing

187

When using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser. For

more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75 and "Starting the Dell

Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 76.

In the navigation panel on the left, click

Print Server Settings

tab.

Click

Port Settings

and select

check box in

Google Cloud Print

under

Port Status

Registering the Printer to Your Google Account

To register the printer to your Google account, follow the procedure below.

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser. For

more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75 and "Starting the Dell

Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 76.

In the navigation panel on the left, select

Print Server Settings

and click

Google Cloud Print

Click

A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud Print printer registration web site is printed.

From the web browser of your computer, visit the Google web site and sign in with your Google account. Visit the

Google Cloud Print registration web site by entering the URL into your web browser. You can also visit the site by

scanning the QR code with your mobile device.

On the Google Cloud Print registration web site, click

Finish printer registration

Click

Manage your printers

. Your printer will be listed in the

Printers

list and will be ready for use with the Google

Cloud Print service.

Printing via Google Cloud Print

The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device. You can see the application list that

supports Google Cloud Print service on the Google web site.

Printing From an Application on a Mobile Device

The following procedure uses the Google Drive application on an Android mobile device as an example.

Install the Google Drive application on your mobile device.

NOTE:

You can download the application from Google Play.

Access the Google Drive application from your mobile device and tap

to select the document.

Ta p

and then tap

Select your printer from the list.

Select printer options and then tap

188

Printing

Printing From Google Chrome

The following procedure uses the Google Chrome browser on a Windows

PC as an example.

Open the Google Chrome browser.

Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.

Click

(varies depending on the version of the Google Chrome browser) in the top right corner and then

click

Click

Change

in the

Destination

area.

Choose your printer from the Google Cloud Print area.

Click

Printing a Report Page

You can print various types of reports and lists. For details about how to print reports or lists, see "Report/List" on

page 128.

Copying

189

Copying

NOTE:

If the Function Enabled setting for

COPY

is set to

On(Password)

, you need to enter the four digit password to use

the copy function. If the Function Enabled setting for

COPY

is set to

Off

, the copy function is disabled. For details, see

"Function Enabled" on page 158.

Loading Paper for Copying

The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For more

details, see "Loading Print Media" on page 168.

Preparing a Document

You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) to load an original document for

copying, scanning and sending a fax. You can load up to 15 sheets of 75 g/m

(20 lb) documents for one job using the

ADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass.

WARNING:

Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.83 in. by 8.27 in. (148.0 mm by 210.0 mm) or larger than 8.5 in. by

14 in. (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having

other unusual characteristics in ADF.

WARNING:

Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled

or rolled paper or torn paper cannot be used in ADF.

WARNING:

Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as

glue, ink and correcting fluid in ADF.

NOTE:

To get the best scan quality, especially for color or grayscale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.

Making Copies From the Document Glass

NOTE:

A computer connection is not required for copying.

NOTE:

Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the ADF, it takes priority over the document on the

document glass.

NOTE:

Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the printed paper. For best results, clean the document

glass before use. For more information, see "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 272.

190

Copying

To make a copy from the document glass:

Open the document cover.

Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner

of the glass.

Close the document cover.

NOTE:

Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption.

NOTE:

If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover until its hinges are caught by the

stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 20 mm, start copying with the cover open.

Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality. For more

information, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 191.

To clear the settings, press the

(Cancel)

button

Ensure that

Start Copy

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button to start copying.

NOTE:

Press the (Cancel) button to cancel a copy job while scanning a document.

Copying

191

Making Copies From the ADF

CAUTION:

Do not load more than 15 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 15 sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF

output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 15 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.

NOTE:

To get the best scan quality, especially for grayscale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.

NOTE:

A computer connection is not required for copying.

Load up to 15

sheets of 75 g/m

(20 lb)

documents face up on the ADF with top edge of the documents in first.

Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size.

NOTE:

Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal-size document.

Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality. For more

information, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 191.

To clear the settings, press the

(Cancel)

button.

Ensure that

Start Copy

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button to start copying.

NOTE:

Press the (Cancel) button to cancel a copy job while scanning a document.

Setting Copy Options

Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing

the

(Start)

button to make copies.

NOTE:

The copy options automatically return to their default status after copying.

Number of Copies

To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad to select the desired value.

192

Copying

Color

To select mode for color or black and white copying:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the

(Color Mode)

button to select the desired color mode.

NOTE:

If the Function Enabled setting for

COPY

is set to

On(Color Password)

, you need to enter the four digit

password to use the copy function. If the Function Enabled setting for

COPY

is set to

Off

, the copy function is disabled. For

details, see "Function Enabled" on page 158.

Collated

To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page document, one complete three page

document will print followed by the second complete document.

NOTE:

Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available memory.

If a memory shortage occurs, cancel the collating by turning

Collated

Uncollated

on the operator panel.

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Collated

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press

the button to select the desired setting, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality. For more

information, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 191.

Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job

Collated Sorts the copy job

Auto Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job

Copying

193

Reduce/Enlarge

To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400 percent when you copy original documents

from the document glass or ADF:

NOTE:

When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.

NOTE:

This item is available only when

Multiple-Up

is set to

Off

Manual

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

button

until

Reduce/Enlarge

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

button

to select the desired settings, and then press the

(Set)

button.

mm series

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

inch series

NOTE:

You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25% to 400%, or press the button to

enlarge the zoom ratio or press the button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.

200%

A5->A4(141%)

A5->B5(122%)

100%*

B5->A5(81%)

A4->A5(70%)

50%

200%

Stmt->Lgl(154%)

Stmt->Ltr(129%)

100%

Lgl->Ltr (78%)

Ldgr->Ltr(64%)

50%

194

Copying

Document Size

To specify the default document size:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Document Size

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press

the

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

Original Type

To select the copy image quality:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Original Type

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to select the desired settings, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

A4 (210 x 297 mm)

A5 (148 x 210 mm)

B5 (182 x 257 mm)

Letter (8.5 x 11")

Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")

Executive (7.25 x 10.5")

The default varies depending on

country-specific factory default.

Text Suitable for documents with text.

Text & Photo* Used for documents with both text and photos.

Photo Suitable for documents with photos.

Copying

195

Lighter/Darker

To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Lighter/Darker

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

Sharpness

To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Sharpness

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to select the desired settings, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

Lighter2 Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1

Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharper

Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Softer Makes the copy softer than the original.

Softest

196

Copying

Auto Exposure

To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Auto Exposure

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Multiple-Up

To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper:

Auto:

Automatically

reduces the size of

images to fit in one

page.

Manual:

Reduces the size of

images in the custom size

according to the setting of

the Reduce/Enlarge

menu.

Copying

197

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Multiple-Up

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to select the desired setting, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality. For more

information, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 191.

Ensure that

Start Copy

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button to start copying.

When you are using the document glass and

Multiple-Up

is set to

Auto

, or

Manual

, the display prompts you

for another page. Press the button to select

Yes

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

If you select

Yes

, press the button to select

Continue

Cancel

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Margin Top/Bottom

To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Margin Top/Bottom

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto Automatically reduces the size of original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Manual Prints the original size of original images onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in

Reduce/Enlarge

4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

198

Copying

Margin Left/Right

To specify the left and right margins of the copy:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Margin Left/Right

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

Margin Middle

To specify the middle margin of the copy:

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Margin Middle

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (

) are the factory default menu settings.

4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

0 mm*/0.0 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Copying

199

Copying an ID Card

You can copy both sides of ID card on one side of a sheet of paper in its original size by selecting Start ID Copy.

To make a copy:

Place an ID card facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Copy)

button

To specify the copy options below, press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

•Lighter/Darker

•Sharpness

•Auto Exposure

• Color

For details about copy options, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 191.

Press the button until

Start ID Copy

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

After the front side of the ID card is scanned, the display prompts you to turn it over.

To scan the rear side of the ID card, turn it over and press the button until

Continue

is highlighted, and

then press the

(Set)

button.

To finish copying without scanning the rear side of the ID card, press the button until

Print Now

highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button or the

(Start)

button.

NOTE:

You can shortcut by pressing the (ID Copy) button on the operator panel.

NOTE:

If the Function Enabled setting for COPY is set to On(Color Password), you need to enter the four digit

password to start copying in color. For details, see "Function Enabled" on page 158.

Changing the Default Settings

The COPY menu options, including contrast, and image quality can be set as your commonly used modes. When

you copy a document, the default settings are used unless they are changed by using the corresponding buttons on

the operator panel.

NOTE:

While you set copy options, pressing the (Cancel) button cancels the changed settings and returns to the default

status.

To create your own default settings:

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Defaults Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Copy Defaults

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and

then press the

(Set)

button.

Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

200

Scanning

Scanning Overview

NOTE:

If the Function Enabled setting for

SCAN

is set to

On(Password)

, you need to enter the four digit password to use

the scan function. If the Function Enabled setting for

SCAN

is set to

Off

, the scan function is disabled. For details, see

"Function Enabled" on page 158.

You can use your Dell™ Color Multifunction Printer | E525w to turn pictures and text into editable images on your

computer.

The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or

document after you scan it in to your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.

Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If you require a

resolution above those recommended in the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or

pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.

Scanning From the Operator Panel - Using an Application

NOTE:

Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.

NOTE:

You can specify the file type, file name and output destination of the scanned file using Dell Document Hub. For details,

see the FAQs in Dell Document Hub.

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Scan)

button.

Press the button until

Scan to Computer

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Computer

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Configure the scan settings as necessary.

Settings such as file format and color mode are available. To configure these settings, press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button. For details about setting items, see "Scan

Defaults" on page 121.

Ensure that

Start Scan

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

Type Resolution

Documents 300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or color

Documents of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale

Photographs and pictures 100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale

Images for an inkjet printer 150–300 dpi

Images for a high-resolution printer 300–600 dpi

Scanning

201

Scanning From the Operator Panel - Using Web Services on Devices

(WSD)

If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD) protocol, you can use

the protocol to send scanned images to a computer.

NOTE:

You need to connect the printer and your computer via the protocol before scanning your documents.

NOTE:

The protocol is supported only on Windows Vista

, Windows

7, Windows

8, and Windows

8.1.

Printer Setup for Scanning via Web Services on Devices (WSD)

Setup the printer and computer for connection using Web Services on Devices (WSD).

Checking the Printer Setting

Set WSD to Enable in the printer settings. See "Protocol" on page 141 for details.

Setting Up the Computer

NOTE:

For Windows

8 and Windows

8.1, the computer automatically connects the printer using Web Services on Devices

(WSD). There is no need to install the printer manually.

For Windows

Click

Start



Computer



Network

Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click

Install

. The printer is connected using Web Services on Devices

(WSD).

For Windows Vista

Click

Start



Network

Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click

Install

Click

Continue

. The printer is connected using Web Services on Devices (WSD).

Procedures for Scanning via Web Services on Devices (WSD)

Load the document(s) facing up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Scan)

button.

Press the button until

Scan to Computer

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired computer you want to send the scan job to is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Event

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired scan event is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Which application each scan event is associated with depends on the setting on the computer.

Ensure that

Start Scan

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

202

Scanning

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver

Your printer supports the TWAIN driver for scanning images. TWAIN is one of the standard components provided

by Windows Vista

, Windows

7, Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2003, Windows Server

2008,

Windows Server

2008 R2, Windows Server

2012, Windows Server

2012 R2, Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, OS X

10.8, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10, and works with various scanners.

NOTE:

Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the Ethernet or USB cable.

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Start the graphic software such as Adobe

Photoshop

From the software, select the command that starts the scanning, and then select the printer as a scanner.

The procedure for selecting the scan start command varies depending on the software. For details, see the manual

supplied with the software.

Select your scanning preferences and click

Preview

to display the preview image.

NOTE:

Preview is available only when you place a document on the document glass.

NOTE:

The illustration may vary for different operating systems.

Select the desired properties from the

Image Quality

and

Image Options

tabs.

Click

Scan

to start scanning.

Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.

Scanning

203

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver

Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by

Windows

operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA

driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software.

NOTE:

Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Start the drawing software such as

Paint

NOTE:

When you use Windows Vista

or Windows Server

2008, use Windows Photo Gallery instead of Paint.

Click

File



From Scanner or Camera

(

Paint

button



From scanner or camera

for Windows

7, Windows

Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2008 R2, Windows Server

2012, and Windows Server

2012 R2).

The

Scan using Dell E525w Scanner

window appears.

NOTE:

The illustration may vary for different operating systems.

Select your scanning preferences and click

Adjust the quality of the scanned picture

to display the

Advanced Properties

dialog box.

Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click

Click

Scan

to start scanning.

Click

Save As

from the

File

menu.

Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.

204

Scanning

Scanning to a Computer or Server via SMB/FTP

Overview

The Scan to Network Folder feature allows you to scan documents and send the scanned document to a network

computer via the FTP or SMB protocol.

You can select the kind of server and specify a destination to store the scanned document with the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.

The following items are required to use the Scan to Network Folder feature.

•Using SMB

To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following operating systems that includes folder

sharing.

For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.

•Windows Vista

•Windows

8.1

•Windows Server

2003

•Windows Server

2008

•Windows Server

2008 R2

•Windows Server

2012

•Windows Server

2012 R2

•Mac OS X 10.6

• OS X 10.7

• OS X 10.8

• OS X 10.9

• OS X 10.10

Scan

Using FTP

Using SMB

FTP Server

Computer

Scanning

205

•Using FTP

To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server (login name and

password) are required.

•Windows Vista

, Windows

7, Windows Server

2003, Windows Server

2008, and Windows Server

2008

FTP service of Microsoft

Internet Information Services 6.0

•Windows

8 and Windows Server

2012

FTP service of Microsoft

Internet Information Services 8.0

•Mac OS X

FTP service of Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10

For information on how to configure the FTP service, contact your system administrator.

Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Network Folder feature.

"Confirming a Login Name and Password" on page 206

"Creating a Folder to Store the Document" on page 207

"Registering Destinations in the Address Book" on page 209

"Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server" on page 215

206

Scanning

Confirming a Login Name and Password

When Using SMB

The Scan to Network Folder feature requires a user login account with a valid and non-empty password for

authentication. Confirm a login user name and password.

If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password for your user login account with the

following procedure.

For Windows Vista

and Windows

Click

Start



Control Panel

Click

User Accounts and Family Safety

Click

User Accounts

Click

Create a password for your account

and add in a password for your user login account.

For Windows

8 and Windows Server

2012

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel

Click

Change PC settings

Click

Users

Click

Create a Password

and add in a password for your user login account.

For Windows

8.1 and Windows Server

2012 R2

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel

Click

Change PC settings

Click

Accounts

Click

Sign-in options

Click

Add

under

Password

, and add in a password for your user login account.

For Windows Server

2008

Click

Start



Control Panel

Double-click

User Accounts

Click

Create a password for your account

and add in a password for your user login account.

Scanning

207

For Windows Server

2008 R2

Click

Start



Control Panel

Select

User Accounts

Click

User Accounts

Click

Create a password for your account

and add in a password for your user login account.

For Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10

Click

System Preferences



Users & Groups

(

Accounts

for Mac OS X 10.6).

Select

Change Password

Enter a password for your user login account in

New password

Re-enter the password in

Verify

After you confirmed a login user name and password, go to "Creating a Folder to Store the Document" on page 207.

When Using FTP

The Scan to Network Folder feature requires a user name and a password. For your user name and password, contact

your system administrator.

Creating a Folder to Store the Document

When Using SMB

Share a folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure.

For Windows Vista

, Windows

7, Windows

8, Windows

8.1, Windows Server

2008, Windows Server

2008 R2,

Windows Server

2012, and Windows Server

2012 R2

Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name,

MyShare

Right-click the folder, and then select

Properties

208

Scanning

Click the

Sharing

tab, and then click

Advanced Sharing

Select the

Share this folder

check box.

Enter a shared name in the

Share name

box.

NOTE:

Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.

Click

Permissions

to give write permission for this folder.

Click

Add

Search user login name by clicking

Advanced

, or enter the user login name in the

Enter the object names

to select

box and click

Check Names

to confirm (Example of user login name,

Myself

Click

when you are done.

Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the

Full Control

check box. This will grant you

permission to send the document to this folder.

NOTE:

Do not use Everyone as the user login name.

Scanning

209

Click

NOTE:

To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.

Example: Folder name:

MyShare

, Second-level folder name:

MyPic

, Third-level folder name:

John

You should now see

MyShare\MyPic\John

in your directory.

After you created a folder, go to "Registering Destinations in the Address Book" on page 209.

For Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10

Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name,

MyShare

NOTE:

Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.

Select the created folder, and then select

Get Info

from the

File

menu.

Select the

Shared folder

check box, and then close the window.

Open

System Preferences

, and then click

Sharing

Select the

File Sharing

check box, and then click

Options

Select the

Share files and folders using SMB (Windows)

(

Share files and folders using SMB

for OS X 10.9 and

OS X 10.10) check box and your account name.

Enter your account password, and then click

Click

Done

When Using FTP

For a destination to store the document, contact your system administrator.

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

You can configure the printer settings to use the Scan to Network Folder feature with the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.

210

Scanning

From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Open a web browser.

Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click

The printer's web page appears.

NOTE:

For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Address" on page 45.

Click

Address Book

The login dialog box appears.

Enter the correct user name and password.

NOTE:

The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL).

Click the

Server Address

tab.

Select any unused number and click

Create

Scanning

211

The

Server Address

page appears.

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:

1Name Enter a friendly name that you want to display on the Address Book.

2Server Type Select SMB if you store the document in a shared folder of your computer.

Select FTP if you use a FTP server.

3Server Address Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server that you have shared out.

IPv4 and IPv6 are both supported.

The following are examples:

•For

FTP

Server name: myhost.example.com

(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)

IP address (IPv4): 192.0.2.1

•For

SMB

Server name: myhost

IP address (IPv4): 192.0.2.1

4Share Name

For SMB only.

On the Windows

operating system, enter the share name of the folder to store the scanned

document on the recipient computer.

On the Mac OS, enter the folder name to store the scanned document on the recipient

computer.

212

Scanning

After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server" on page 215.

From the Address Book Editor

Click

Start



All Programs



Dell Printers



Dell Printer Hub

Dell Printer Hub opens.

Select

Dell Color MFP E525w

print driver at

My Printers

Click on the link

Address Book Editor

from list at the left side of the page.

The

Select Device

window appears.

Select your printer from the list.

Click

5Server Path For SMB

To store the scanned document in the share folder directly without creating any subfolder, leave

the space blank.

To store the scanned document in the folder you created under the share folder, enter the path as

following.

Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder

name: John

You should now see

MyShare\MyPic\John

in your directory.

In this case, enter the following item.

Server Path:

\MyPic\John

For FTP

Enter the server path to store the scanned document.

6Server Port Number Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB

and 21 for FTP.

7Login Name Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP

server.

8Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.

NOTE:

Empty password is not valid when scanned documents are sent via the SMB protocol.

Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a Login Name

and Password" on page 206 for details on how to add a password in your user login account.)

9Re-enter Password Re-enter your password.

MyShare (Share folder)

MyPic

John

Scanning

213

Click

Tool



New (Device Address Book)



Server

The

Server Address

dialog box appears.

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:

1Name Enter a friendly name that you want to display on the Address Book.

2Server Type Select Computer if you store the document in a shared folder of your computer.

Select Server if you use a FTP server.

3Computer Settings

wizard

Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides you through several steps.

When you complete the steps in the wizard, the items 4 to 10 are entered automatically. For

details, click Help.

214

Scanning

After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server" on page 215.

4Sever Name /

IP Address

Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server that you have shared out.

IPv4 and IPv6 are both supported.

The following are examples:

•For

Computer

Server name: myhost

IP address (IPv4): 192.0.2.1

•For

Server

Server name: myhost.example.com

(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)

IP address (IPv4): 192.0.2.1

5Share Name

Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.

6Path

For SMB

To store the scanned document in the share folder directly without creating any subfolder, leave

the space blank.

To store the scanned document in the folder you created under the share folder, enter the path as

following.

Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder

name: John

You should now see

MyShare\MyPic\John

in your directory.

In this case, enter the following item.

Path:

\MyPic\John

For FTP

Enter the path to store the scanned document.

7Login Name

Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP

server.

8Login Password

Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.

NOTE:

Empty password is not valid when scanned documents are sent via the SMB protocol.

Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a Login Name

and Password" on page 206 for details on how to add a password in your user login account.)

9Confirm Login

Password

Re-enter your password.

10 Port Number

Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB

and 21 for FTP.

MyShare (Share folder)

MyPic

John

Scanning

215

Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Scan)

button.

Press the button until

Scan to Network Folder

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to select the destination to store the scanned file in.

• You can also directly find the destination by its ID number on the Address Book. Enter the ID using the

numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

• To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

NOTE:

Only one destination can be specified at a time.

Ensure that the desired destination is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Configure the scan settings as necessary.

Settings such as file format and color mode are available. To configure these settings, press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button. For details about setting items, see "Scan

Defaults" on page 121.

Ensure that

Start Scan

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

Scanning to USB Memory

The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the scanned data to a USB memory. With

this feature you can also scan both sides of ID card on one side of a page in its original size.

Basic Scanning Procedures

Insert a USB memory to the USB port of the printer.

216

Scanning

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Ensure that

Scan to

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

You can also scan documents by the following steps.

Press the

(Scan)

button.

Ensure that

Scan to USB Memory

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to select the folder to store the scanned file in, and then press the

(Set)

button.

If you do not specify the folder, skip this step.

Configure the scan settings as necessary.

Settings such as file format and color mode are available. To configure these settings, press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button. For details about setting items, see "Scan

Defaults" on page 121.

Ensure that

Start Scan

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

Using the ID Scan

Perform steps 1 to 5 in "Basic Scanning Procedures" on page 215.

Be sure to place the ID card on the document glass.

Press the button until

Start ID Scan

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

After the front side of the ID card is scanned, the display prompts you to turn it over.

To scan the rear side of the ID card, turn it over, press the button until

Continue

is highlighted, and

then press the

(Set)

button.

To finish scanning without scanning the rear side of the ID card, press the button until

Save Now

highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Image

To send an e-mail attached with the scanned image from your printer, follow the steps below:

•Set up

E-mail Server Settings

E-mail Alert

on the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

. See "E-mail Alert" on

page 104 for more details. For information about your e-mail server, contact your system administrator or your local

Internet service provider (ISP).

• Register e-mail addresses in the Address Book using the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

. See "Setting an

E-mail Address Book" on page 216 for more details.

Setting an E-mail Address Book

Open a web browser.

Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click

The printer's web page appears.

NOTE:

For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Address" on page 45.

Scanning

217

Click

Address Book

The login dialog box appears.

Enter the correct user name and password.

NOTE:

The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL).

Click

Create

218

Scanning

Enter a name and e-mail address in the

Name

and

E-mail Address

fields.

Click

Apply New Settings

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Scan)

button.

Press the button until

Scan to E-mail

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Specify an e-mail address using the numeric keypad or the Address Book.

When specifying destinations, you can select

BCC

as a destination type.

To enter the e-mail address directly using the numeric keypad:

Ensure that

Enter Address

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the e-mail address using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Only one destination can be specified at a time. To specify multiple destinations, use the Address Book.

NOTE:

The destination type is automatically set to

To select personal addresses from Address Book:

Press the button until

Address Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Contacts)

button.

Scanning

219

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

You can also directly find the destination by its ID number on the Address Book. Enter the number using the

numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the button repeatedly to display

BCC

as a destination type, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To select group addresses from Address Book:

Press the button until

E-mail Group

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Contacts)

button.

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

You can also directly find the destination by its ID number on the Address Book. Enter the number using the

numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the button repeatedly to display

BCC

as a destination type, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To search destinations from Address Book:

Press the button until

Search Address Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the personal or group names whose destinations you

want to specify, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed.

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the button repeatedly to display

BCC

as a destination type, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To search destinations from LDAP Server:

NOTE:

The printer needs to be configured in order to access an LDAP server. See "Authentication System" and "LDAP

Server" on page 108.

Press the button until

Search Network Address Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the personal or group names whose destinations you

want to specify, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed.

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the button repeatedly to display

BCC

as a destination type, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

From Setting

is highlighted, and then press

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

If this setting item is not displayed, make sure that

Edit From Field

is set to

Enable

. For details, see "Edit

From Field" on page 159.

220

Scanning

Specify the sender address of the e-mail using the numeric keypad or the Address Book.

The specified address is notified to the recipient when the e-mail is sent. If no e-mail address is specified here, the

address in

Reply Address

is notified as a sender information instead. For details, see "E-mail Alert" on

page 104.

NOTE:

Be sure to specify an e-mail address either in

From Setting

or in

Reply Address

. Otherwise, the

printer cannot start sending the e-mail.

Configure the scan settings as necessary.

Settings such as file format and color mode are available. For details about setting items, see "Scan Defaults" on

page 121.

Ensure that

Start Scan

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

Faxing

221

Faxing

NOTE:

If the Function Enabled setting for

FAX

is set to

On(Password)

, you need to enter the four digit password to use the

fax function. If the Function Enabled setting for

FAX

is set to

Off

, the fax function is disabled. For details, see "Function

Enabled" on page 158.

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

NOTE:

Ensure that the telephone line is connected properly. For details, see "Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 35.

Configuring Fax Initial Settings

NOTE:

The following settings can be configured also using Advance Tools on Easy Setup Navigator.

Setting Your Country

You need to set the country where your printer is used for using the fax service on the printer.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Country

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to select the country where the printer is used, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Are You Sure?

is displayed, press the button to select

Yes

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.

NOTE:

In case of either one, when you configure the country setting, the information, which is registered to the device, is

initialized.

Setting the Printer ID

In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The printer ID,

containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from

your printer.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Number

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter your fax number using the number keypad.

NOTE:

If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the (Backspace) button to delete the last digit.

Press the

(Set)

button when the number on the display is correct.

Press the button until

Fax Header Name

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad.

222

Faxing

You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad, including special symbols by pressing the 1, *,

and # buttons.

For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to

Enter Characters" on page 73.

Press the

(Set)

button when the name on the display is correct.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

Setting the Time and Date

NOTE:

It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

System Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Date & Time

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Set Date

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad, or press the button to select the correct date.

NOTE:

If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the button to re-enter the digit.

Press the

(Set)

button when the date on the display is correct.

Press the button until

Set Time

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad, or press the button to select the correct time.

Press the

(Set)

button when the time on the display is correct.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

Changing the Clock Mode

You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

System Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Date & Time

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Date Format

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired format is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

Faxing

223

Setting Sounds

Speaker Volume

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Line Monitor

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Ringer Volume

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Ring Tone Volume

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press

the

button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Specifying the Fax Settings

Changing the Fax Settings Options

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad.

Press the

(Set)

button to save the selection.

If necessary, repeat steps 5 to 7.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

224

Faxing

Available Fax Settings Options

You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:

Option Description

Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the

handset of the external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.

Fax Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for

the time specified in Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically

receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the

internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.

Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this

mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are

fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your

country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France

and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.

DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a

distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the

telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate

number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to

monitor for that specific ring pattern.

Auto Rec Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.

Auto Rec TEL/FAX Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone

receives an incoming call.

Auto Rec Ans/FAX Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering

machine receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal

speaker until a connection is made.

Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the

internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Tele phone/Fax.

Line Type Sets the line type.

Tone/Pulse Sets the dialing type.

Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy. If you enter

0, the printer will not redial.

Redial Delay Specifies the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax

numbers registered in the Phone Book.

Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.

Remote Rcv Tone Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.

Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Fax Header Name Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be

entered.

Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.

Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a service provided by some telephone

companies.

Faxing

225

Prefix Dial

NOTE:

Prefix Dial only supports the environment where you send a fax to the external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must

do the following from the operator panel.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Line Type

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

PBX

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Back)

button to return to the previous menu.

Forward Settings Off Does not forward received faxes.

Forward Only Forwards incoming faxes to the fax number specified in Fax Forward Number

below without printing.

Print and Forward Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the fax number specified in Fax Forward

Number below.

E-mail only Forwards incoming faxes to the e-mail address specified in Forwarding E-mail

Address of "Fax Settings" on page 91 without printing. The faxes are converted

to a PDF file and sent to the destination as an e-mail attachment.

E-mail and Print Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the e-mail address specified in

Forwarding E-mail Address of "Fax Settings" on page 91. The faxes are

converted to a PDF file and sent to the destination as an e-mail attachment.

Forward to Server Forwards incoming faxes to the server specified in from Server Type through

Subdirectory Path (optional) of "Fax Settings" on page 91 without printing.

The faxes are converted to a PDF file and stored in the destination.

Fwd to Server and

Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the server specified in from Server Type

through Subdirectory Path (optional) of "Fax Settings" on page 91. The faxes

are converted to a PDF file and stored in the destination.

Fax Fwd Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.

Prefix Dial Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number prioritizes over any auto dial number. It is

useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Discard Size Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit

onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the

output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.

ECM Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.

Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax

communications.

Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or

only when an error occurs.

Protocol Monitor Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error

occurs.

Country Sets the country where the printer is used.

Option Description

226

Faxing

Press the button until

Prefix Dial

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Back)

button to return to the previous menu.

Press the button until

Prefix Dial Num

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter an up-to-five-digit prefix number from 0

–

9, *, and #.

Press the

(Set)

button when the prefix dial number on the display is correct.

Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Sending a Fax

You can fax data from your printer.

Sending a Fax Automatically

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers to specify the fax number. For more information, see "Automatic

Dialing" on page 235.

NOTE:

To call up the fax number the printer dialed last, press the

(Redial/Pause) button, and then press the (Set)

button.

Configure the fax settings as necessary.

Settings such as resolution and contrast are available. To configure these settings, press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button. For details about setting items, see "Setting

Fax Options" on page 227.

Ensure that

Start Fax

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press the button to select

Yes

to add more documents or to select

to send the fax immediately, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Press the (Cancel) button to cancel the fax job while sending the fax.

Sending a Fax Manually

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Press the button until

OnHook

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Faxing

227

Configure the fax settings as necessary.

Settings such as resolution and contrast are available. For details about setting items, see "Setting Fax Options" on

page 227.

Press the button until

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad.

You can also use speed dial numbers to specify the fax number. For more information, see "Sending a Fax Using

Speed Dial" on page 235.

Press the

(Start)

button.

If the document is loaded on the document glass, press the button until

Manual Send

is highlighted, and

then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Press the (Cancel) button to cancel the fax job while sending the fax.

Setting Fax Options

Set the following options for the current fax job before pressing the (Start) button to send faxes.

NOTE:

The fax options automatically return to their default status after faxing.

Resolution

To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission:

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Specify a fax number.

For details, see "Sending a Fax Automatically" on page 226 and "Automatic Dialing" on page 235.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Resolution

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

NOTE:

Faxes scanned in the

Super Fine

mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.

Original Type

To select the default original type for the current fax job:

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Specify a fax number.

For details, see "Sending a Fax Automatically" on page 226 and "Automatic Dialing" on page 235.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Original Type

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-

matrix printer.

Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the

remote machine also supports the super fine resolution.

Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

228

Faxing

Press the button to select the desired setting, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Lighter/Darker

To adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the original:

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Specify a fax number.

For details, see "Sending a Fax Automatically" on page 226 and "Automatic Dialing" on page 235.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Lighter/Darker

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or button to select the desired setting, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Confirming Transmissions

When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode.

If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.

If you receive an error message, p

ress

the

(Set)

button to clear the message and try to send the document again.

You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission. For more

information, see "Printing a Report" on page 241.

Automatic Redialing

If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer will automatically redial

the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.

To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options"

on page 224.

NOTE:

The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the number was manually entered.

Text * Suitable for documents with text.

Photo Suitable for documents with photos.

Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1

Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Faxing

229

Sending a Delayed Fax

You can save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time in order to take advantage of lower long

distance rates.

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers to specify the fax number. For more information, see "Automatic

Dialing" on page 235.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Delayed Start

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Use the numeric keypad or press the or button to specify the start time, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Configure the fax settings as necessary.

Settings such as resolution and contrast are available. For details about setting items, see "Setting Fax Options" on

page 227.

Ensure that

Start Fax

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

Once this setting is activated, your printer stores all the documents to be faxed to its memory and sends them at

the specified time. After faxing is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.

Sending a Fax From Your Computer (Direct Fax)

You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the fax driver.

NOTE:

Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.

Send data via the fax driver

Sending machine (your

printer)

Send fax

Receiving machine (fax

machine/multifunction

printer)

230

Faxing

For Windows®

NOTE:

The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on

the application you are using.

NOTE:

To use this feature, you must install the fax driver.

Open the file you want to send by fax.

Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select

Dell Color MFP E525w Fax

Click

Preferences

The

Printing Preferences

dialog box appears. Specify the fax settings. For more information, click

Help

of the

driver.

NOTE:

The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.

Click

to close the

Printing Preferences

dialog box.

Click

The

Set / Check Fax Transmission

: dialog box appears.

Faxing

231

Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:

• Enter a name and phone number directly.

• Select a recipient from the Phone Book saved on your computer.

• Select a recipient from a database other than the Phone Book.

For more information on how to specify the destination, click

Help

of the driver.

NOTE:

Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked

with a password.

Click

Start Sending

For Macintosh

NOTE:

The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on

the application you are using.

NOTE:

To use this feature, you must install the fax driver.

232

Faxing

Open the file you want to send by fax.

Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select

Dell Color MFP E525w Fax

Specify the fax settings.

NOTE:

The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.

Click

The

Set/Check Fax Transmission

dialog box appears.

Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:

• Enter a name and phone number directly.

• Select a recipient from the Phone Book saved on your computer.

NOTE:

Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked

with a password.

Click

Start Sending

Faxing

233

Receiving a Fax

About Receiving Modes

There are five receiving modes: Telephone, Fax, Telephone/Fax, Ans Machine/Fax, and DRPD.

NOTE:

To use the

Telephone/Fax

mode or

Ans Machine/Fax

mode, attach an external telephone or answering

machine to the phone connector

()

on the back of your printer.

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes

Faxes can only be printed on letter-, A4-, or legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print

Media" on page 168.

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode

Your printer is preset to receive a fax automatically at the factory.

If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax receive mode after a specified period of time and

receives the fax.

To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call, see

"Available Fax Settings Options" on page 224.

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode

To receive a fax manually, pick up the handset of the external telephone, and follow the instructions below.

Press the

(Fax)

button when you hear fax tones on the external telephone.

OffHook

appears.

Press the

(Start)

button

Press the button until

Manual Receive

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The printer receives the document.

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans Machine/Fax Mode

To use the Telephone/Fax mode or Ans Machine/Fax mode, you must attach an external telephone or

answering machine to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.

In the Telephone/Fax mode, if the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time

specified in Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically receives a fax.

In the Ans Machine/Fax mode, if the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it

would normally. If your printer hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive a fax.

NOTE:

If you have set your printer to

Ans Machine/Fax

and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering

machine is connected to your printer, your printer will automatically go into the fax receive mode after a predefined time.

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone

This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected to the phone connector ( ) on the

back of your printer. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having

to go to the printer.

When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press the two-digit number on the external

telephone.

The printer receives the document.

234

Faxing

Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing the two-

digit keys once again.

The remote receive code is set to Off at the factory. You can change the two-digit number to whatever you choose.

For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 224.

You can also receive the fax by pressing the

(Fax)

button

when you hear the fax tones on the external telephone.

See "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode" on page 233.

NOTE:

Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.

Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode

The DRPD is a telephone company service which allows a user to use a single telephone line to answer several

different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing

patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your

telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another

telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your fax number from outside.

To set up the DRPD:

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

DRPD Pattern

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD mode; see "Available Fax Settings Options" on

page 224.

Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your

telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.

Receiving Faxes in the Memory

Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you

receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the

memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer automatically prints

the fax.

Polling Receive

You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Polling Receive

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Start Fax

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

Faxing

235

Automatic Dialing

Speed Dial

You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (01– 99).

When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change the speed dial number from

the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Setting Speed Dial

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Phone Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Speed Dial

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired speed dial number between 01 and 99 is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The fax numbers registered in the dial numbers between 01 and 04 are also allocated to the One Touch Dial

buttons between 01 and 04. We recommend that you register the most frequently used destinations in these

buttons to directly call up.

Ensure that

Name

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the name, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Phone Number

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To insert a pause between numbers, press the

(Redial/Pause)

button. "-" appears on the display.

Ensure that

Apply Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

When

Are You Sure?

is displayed, ensure that

Yes

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Specify a fax number using speed dial.

Speed dial enables you to quickly and easily specify destinations by selecting or searching from a list of destinations

registered in the Phone Book or in an LDAP server. You can also directly specify destinations by entering the speed

dial numbers or pressing the One Touch Dial buttons.

To select destinations directly by entering the speed dial numbers:

Press the button until

Speed Dial

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

236

Faxing

Enter the speed dial number (01 to 99) using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Entering the asterisk (*) enables you to search and display multiple destinations at a time. For example, if you

enter "0*," the speed dial numbers beginning with 0 are called up. In this case, all the destinations registered in

the dial numbers between 01 and 09 are displayed.

To select destinations directly by pressing the One Touch Dial buttons:

Press the One Touch Dial button (01 to 04).

Ensure that the desired destination is displayed, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To select destinations from Phone Book:

Press the button until

Phone Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Phone Book)

button.

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the

(Set)

button to select the destination, and then press the button.

You can also directly find the destination by its speed dial number. Enter the number using the numeric

keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To search destinations from Phone Book:

Press the button until

Search Phone Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the personal names whose destinations you want to

specify, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed.

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the

(Set)

button to select the destination, and then press the button.

To search destinations from LDAP Server:

NOTE:

The printer needs to be configured in order to access an LDAP server. See "Authentication System" and "LDAP

Server" on page 108.

Press the button until

Search Network Phone Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the personal names whose destinations you want to

specify, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed.

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the

(Set)

button to select the destination, and then press the button.

Configure the fax settings as necessary.

Settings such as resolution and contrast are available. To configure these settings, press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button. For details about setting items, see "Setting

Fax Options" on page 227.

Ensure that

Start Fax

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

Faxing

237

When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press the button to select

Yes

to add more documents or to select

to send the fax immediately, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Group Dial

If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and

set them under a one-digit group dial location. This allows you to use a group dial number setting to send the same

document to all the destinations in the group.

NOTE:

You need to register fax destinations in the speed dial beforehand.

NOTE:

You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.

Setting Group Dial

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Phone Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Group Dial

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Name

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the name, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Speed Dial No

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to move the cursor to the speed dial number you want to register in the group dial, press the

(Set)

button to select the number, and then press the button.

Ensure that

Apply Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

When

Are You Sure?

is displayed, ensure that

Yes

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

Editing Group Dial

You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Phone Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Group Dial

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the group dial number that you want to edit is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To change the group dial name:

Ensure that

Name

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter a new name, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Apply Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

When

Are You Sure?

is displayed, ensure that

Yes

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

238

Faxing

To change the speed dial number:

Press the button until

Speed Dial No

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button to move the cursor to the speed dial number you want to edit, press the

(Set)

button

to select or deselect the number, and then press the button.

Press the button until

Apply Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

When

Are You Sure?

is displayed, ensure that

Yes

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To delete the group dial:

Press the

(Backspace)

button.

When

Are You Sure?

is displayed, ensure that

Yes

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

If you want to edit another group dial number, repeat step 6.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission)

Load the document(s) face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document(s) in first.

Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the ADF" on page 191 or "Making Copies From

the Document Glass" on page 189.

Press the

(Fax)

button.

Specify a fax number using group dial.

You can specify destinations by selecting or searching from a list of destinations registered in the Phone Book.

To select destinations from Phone Book:

Press the button until

Group Dial

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the

(Phone Book)

button.

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the

(Set)

button to select the destination, and then press the button.

You can also directly find the destination by its group dial number. Enter the number using the numeric

keypad, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To search destinations from Phone Book:

Press the button until

Search Phone Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the group names whose destinations you want to specify,

and then press the

(Set)

button.

Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed.

Press the button to move the cursor to the desired destination.

To check the detailed information of the destination, press the # button.

Press the

(Set)

button to select the destination, and then press the button.

Faxing

239

Configure the fax settings as necessary.

Settings such as resolution and contrast are available. To configure these settings, press the button until

Preferences

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button. For details about setting items, see "Setting

Fax Options" on page 227.

Ensure that

Start Fax

is highlighted, and then press the

(Start)

button.

When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press the button to select

Yes

to add more documents or to select

to send the fax immediately, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Printing an Address Book List

You can check your automatic dial setting by printing an Address Book list.

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Report / List

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Address Book

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

A list of your speed dial and group dial entries is printed.

Other Ways to Fax

Using the Secure Receiving Mode

You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure

fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is

unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will get saved in the memory. When the mode turns off, any

faxes stored will be printed.

NOTE:

Before operation, ensure that

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

To turn the secure receiving mode on:

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Secure Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Secure Receive

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Secure Receive Set

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press

the

button until

Enable

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

NOTE:

The factory-default password is 0000.

To return to the standby mode, press the

(Menu)

button

When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory and the

Job Status

screen displays

Secure Receive

to let you know that there is a fax stored.

NOTE:

If you change the password while Secure Receive Set is Enable, perform steps 1 to 5. Press the

button until Change Password is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button. Enter the new password, and then

press the (Set) button.

240

Faxing

To print rece ived docum ents:

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

Job Status

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Secure Receive

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Enter the password, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The faxes stored in memory are printed.

To turn the secure receiving mode off:

Access the

Secure Receive Set

menu by repeating steps 1 to 6 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:."

Press the button until

Disable

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

Using an Answering Machine

You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as shown above.

• Set your printer to the

Ans Machine/Fax

mode and set

Auto Rec Ans/FAX

to specify the time for the

TAD.

• When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts

receiving the fax.

• If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the fax receive mode after the ring tone sounds

for a predefined time.

Using a Computer Modem

If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up Internet connection, connect the computer

modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown above.

To the wall

jack

Printer Line Telephone answering device Phone

To the Internet

Printer

Line

Telephone answering device Phone

Computer

Faxing

241

• Set your printer to the

Ans Machine/Fax

mode and set

Auto Rec Ans/FAX

to specify the time for the

TAD.

• Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.

• Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.

• Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem.

Printing a Report

The following reports may be useful when using fax:

Address Book

This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer as Address Book information.

Fax Activity

This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.

Protocol Monitor

This report shows the status of the protocol when the latest fax was being sent.

Procedures:

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Report / List

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the report or list you want to print is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

The selected report or list is printed.

Changing Fax Defaults

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Defaults Settings

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Fax Defaults

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the or button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and

then press the

(Set)

button.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed.

To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back)

button.

242

Know Your Printer

21 Understanding Your Printer Software ................................... 243

22 Using Digital Certificates ......................................................... 244

23 Understanding Printer Messages .......................................... 248

24 Specifications............................................................................ 255

Understanding Your Printer Software

243

Understanding Your Printer Software

Use the

Software and Documentation

disc that shipped with your printer to install a combination of software

programs, depending on your operating system. For details on how to use your software, click FAQ or Help of each

software.

Dell Printer Hub (Windows® Only)

This software allows you to share, print, scan, and store digital documents with cloud services. It also notifies you of

the firmware/software updates, printer status and toner level.

Tool Box (Windows® Only)

This allows you to view or specify the printer settings. You can also diagnose the printer settings by using this

software.

Address Book Editor

This allows you to register and edit destinations for sending by fax, the Scan to E-mail feature, and the Scan to

Network Folder feature.

NOTE:

You must install the fax driver before reading or editing the Address Book entries.

1Read the Device Address Book entries from the printer to the Address Book Editor and read the PC Fax Address Book

entries from the computer to the Address Book Editor.

2Allows you to edit a selected Address Book entry in the edit dialog box.

3Deletes a selected Address Book entry.

4Displays Address Book entries.

2 3

244

Using Digital Certificates

The authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print data or setting data.

To use digital certificates, set the digital certificate on the printer, and then enable various SSL/TLS communication.

NOTE:

For information about the digital certificate error, see "Understanding Printer Messages" on page 248 and "Digital

Certificate Problems" on page 305.

Setting a Digital Certificate

The following is a typical setup flow for setting digital certificates.

Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication

Before managing digital certificates, set HTTPS communication with a self-signed certificate.

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Security

tab



SSL/TLS

Click

Create New Certificate

The

Generate Certificate

page is displayed.

Specify each item of the displayed settings, and then click

Generate Certificate

Your request was successfully processed.

is displayed.

Click

Back

Select the

Enabled

check box of

SSL/TLS Server Communication

, and then click

Apply New Settings

Settings have been changed. Restart printer for new settings to take effect.

is displayed.

Click

Restart Printer

Prepare the printer for HTTPS Communication using a self-signed

certificate. For details, see "Preparing to Use HTTPS

Communication" on page 244.

Export a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) from the printer. For

details, see "Exporting a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)" on

page 245.

Receive a signed certificate from a certificate authority using the

Certificate Signing Request (CSR) exported from the printer.

Upload the signed certificate to the printer. For details, see

"Uploading a Signed Certificate" on page 245.

Using Digital Certificates

245

Exporting a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)

NOTE:

To export a CSR from the printer, SSL/TLS Server Communication must be enabled with a self-signed certificate. For

details, see "Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication" on page 244.

NOTE:

If you are using a PKCS #12 digital certificate, do not export the CSR; otherwise, the file cannot be uploaded.

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Security

tab



SSL/TLS

Click

Certificate Signing Request (CSR)

The

Certificate Signing Request (CSR)

page is displayed.

Specify each item of the certificate signing request, and then click

Apply New Settings

Confirm the specified settings, and then click

Export

Save a CSR file to your computer.

Use this CSR to receive a signed certificate from a trusted certificate authority.

Uploading a Signed Certificate

After you have received the signed certificate from a trusted certificate authority, upload the signed certificate to the

printer. You can also upload an external certificate such as PKCS #12 that you created without using the CSR from

the printer.

NOTE:

The maximum number of digital certificates that you can upload is one.

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Security

tab



SSL/TLS

Click

Upload Signed Certificate

The

Upload Signed Certificate

page is displayed.

Click

Choose File

File Name

, and then select the file to be uploaded.

To upload a PKCS #12 digital certificate, you also need to enter the password that is set on the certificate in

Password

and

Re-enter Password

Click

Import

246

Using Digital Certificates

Managing the Digital Certificate

You can confirm or delete a digital certificate set on the printer.

Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see"Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Security

tab



SSL/TLS

Click

Certificate Management

The

Certificate Management

page is displayed.

Deleting a Digital Certificate

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Security

tab



SSL/TLS

Delete a digital certificate to suit your needs.

To delete both the uploaded certificate and the self-signed certificate

Click

Delete All Certificates

Click

Restart Printer

To delete just the digital certificate that is currently in use

Click

Certificate Management

The

Certificate Management

page is displayed.

Click

Delete

at the upper-right corner of the certificate setting you want to delete.

Click

Delete

Click

Restart Printer

NOTE:

When you delete one of either the uploaded certificate or the self-signed certificate, the printer automatically

switches to use the other certificate.

Using Digital Certificates

247

Setting the SSL/TLS Communication Feature

Enabling the SSL/TLS Communication Between the Printer and Client Computers

Setting the server certificate in the printer enables the encrypted communication for when client computers access

the printer to view or change its settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or to print files through

AirPrint.

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Security

tab



SSL/TLS

Confirm that the

Enabled

check box of

SSL/TLS Server Communication

is selected, and then click

Apply New

Settings

Settings have been changed. Restart printer for new settings to take effect.

is displayed.

NOTE:

If Disabled is displayed for SSL/TLS Server Communication, the digital certificate is not set. For details, see "Setting

a Digital Certificate" on page 244.

Click

Restart Printer

Enabling the SSL/TLS Communication Between the Printer and an LDAP Server

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Security

tab



SSL/TLS

Select the

Enabled

check box of

LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication

, and then click

Apply New Settings

Settings have been changed. Restart printer for new settings to take effect.

is displayed.

Click

Restart Printer

Enabling the SSL/TLS Communication Between the Printer and an SMTP Server

Launch the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

For more information, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

Click

Print Server Settings

Click the

Security

tab



SSL/TLS

Select the desired connection method from the

SMTP - SSL/TLS Communication

drop-down list, and then click

Apply New Settings

Settings have been changed. Restart printer for new settings to take effect.

is displayed.

Click

Restart Printer

248

Understanding Printer Messages

The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer

problems you must resolve. This chapter describes messages, their meanings, and how to clear the messages.

CAUTION:

When a status code is displayed, the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the

memory of the printer are not secured.

Status code What you can do

001-360 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell™. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

003-340

003-356

005-121 Remove the jammed paper and close the ADF cover. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF" on page 278.

005-301 Close the ADF cover.

006-370 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

007-371

009-360 Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on page 264.

009-361

009-362

009-363

009-654 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

010-354

010-377

016-315

016-317

016-338

016-339

016-344

016-347

016-354

016-355

016-370

016-372

016-374

016-375

016-376

016-393

016-395

016-503 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the SMTP server and the DNS server are set correctly.

016-504 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the user name and password for the POP3 server are set correctly.

016-506 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the SMTP server address and e-mail destination are set correctly.

016-507 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the user name and password used for the SMTP server are set correctly.

Understanding Printer Messages

249

016-700 Press the

(Set) button to cancel the current print job.

016-701

016-720

016-744 Press the

(Set) button. Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

016-745

016-749 Press the

(Set) button to cancel the current print job.

016-753 PDL emulation error has occurred. Press the

(Set) button to clear the message and cancel the current

print job. Check if the password is correct.

016-755

016-764 Press the

(Set) button. Contact SMTP server administrator.

016-766

016-767 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the e-mail address is correct, and try scanning again.

016-791 Insert the USB memory and press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

016-795 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Check if the file format is correct.

016-797 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Check if the USB memory is securely connected.

016-920 Press the

(Set) button. Check the wireless setting for the access point and the printer, and try wireless

settings again.

016-921

016-930 Remove the unsupported device from the USB port.

016-931

016-981 Press the

(Set) button to cancel the current print job. If you are copying using

Collated

, change the

setting to

Uncollated

and try copying again. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 191.

016-982 The printer memory is full and cannot continue processing the current print job. Press the

(Set) button to

clear the message and cancel the current print job.

016-985 Press the

(Set) button. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution setting or changing the file format of the

scanned image.

017-970

017-980 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

017-981

017-988

024-360 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

024-914 Load the specified paper and press the

(Set) button. See "Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet

Tray" on page 168.

024-946 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Check for any misfed paper in the standard 150 sheet tray, and

set the tray to the printer.

024-969 Load the specified paper and press the

(Set) button. See "Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet

Tray" on page 168.

Status code What you can do

250

Understanding Printer Messages

026-720 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

026-721

026-722

026-723

026-750

026-751

026-752

027-446 Change the IP address of the printer to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.

027-452

031-521 Press the

(Set) button. Confirm login-able computer with your system administrator.

031-526 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the domain name of the SMB server is correct. Check DNS connection,

or check if the name of the forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.

031-529 Press the

(Set) button. Check if password is correct.

031-530 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the working path setting to the SMB server is correct.

031-533 Press the

(Set) button. Check the following:

• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.

• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.

• If the SMB server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.

031-534 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if the SMB server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.

031-535

031-536

031-537 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if the storage location has free space.

031-555 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Check if the network is properly connected.

031-556 Check if the SMB server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.

031-557 Press the

(Set)

button. Change the file name that already exists on the SMB server.

031-558 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Check if the access setting to the SMB server is correct.

031-571 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Check if the network is properly connected.

031-574 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if the domain name of the FTP server is correct.

031-575 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if the host name setting to the FTP server is correct.

031-576 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if the printer communicates with forwarding destination FTP server. For

example, check connection of Ethernet cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.

031-578 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if login name (user name) and password are correct.

031-579 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if the working path setting to the FTP server is correct.

031-582 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.

031-584 Press the

(Set)

button. Check the following:

• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.

• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.

• If the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.

031-585 Press the

(Set)

button. Check if the FTP server encounters any delete/write-protection or disk problem.

031-587

Status code What you can do

Understanding Printer Messages

251

031-588 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.

031-589 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Check if the storage location has free space.

031-594 Press the

(Set) button. Execute the operation again according to the operation procedure. Contact Dell if

this message appears repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 310.

031-598 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the FTP server encounters any write-protection or disk problem.

033-503 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Delete the unnecessary data stored in the memory.

033-513

033-517 Press the

(Set) button. Check if the password is correct.

033-518 Press the

(Set) button. Check if your country code is set correctly.

033-519 Fax service is locked. To continue, press the

(Set) button to clear the message, and disable the fax lock.

033-787 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Delete the unnecessary data stored in the memory, or wait for

a while until sending a fax is completed.

033-788

034-700 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, try the following:

• Check if the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 35.

• Check if the destination number is available.

•Set

Number of Redial

to the larger value.

•Set

Resend Delay

Redial Delay

longer.

034-701

034-702

034-703

034-704

034-705

034-706

034-707 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, try the following:

• Check if the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 35.

• Check if the destination number is available.

•Set

Number of Redial

to the larger value.

•Set

Resend Delay

Redial Delay

longer.

•Lower

Modem Speed

034-708

034-709 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, try the following:

•Set

Number of Redial

to the larger value.

•Set

Resend Delay

Redial Delay

longer.

034-710

034-711 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, try the following:

•Set

Number of Redial

to the larger value.

•Set

Resend Delay

Redial Delay

longer.

•Lower

Modem Speed

034-712

034-713

034-714 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, try the following:

• Check if the destination number is available.

•Set

Number of Redial

to the larger value.

•Set

Resend Delay

Redial Delay

longer.

Status code What you can do

252

Understanding Printer Messages

034-715 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, try the following:

•Set

Number of Redial

to the larger value.

•Set

Resend Delay

Redial Delay

longer.

•Lower

Modem Speed

034-716 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, it will be canceled. When retrying sending the fax, lower

Modem Speed

034-717 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, it will be canceled. Retry sending the fax.

034-718 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, it will be canceled. When retrying sending the fax, lower

Modem Speed

034-719

034-720 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, it will be canceled. When retrying sending the fax, try the following:

•Lower

Modem Speed

•Enable

ECM

034-721 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. If the error continues to appear after the redial for the

specified number of times, it will be canceled. When retrying sending the fax, lower

Modem Speed

034-722

034-723

034-724

034-725

034-726

034-727 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Check if the destination number is available. If the error

continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times, it will be canceled.

034-750 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly. See

"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 35.

034-751 Check if the destination machine blocks your fax as the junk fax. If it does, ask the receiver to disable the

setting.

034-752 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly. See

"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 35.

034-753

034-754 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Lower

Modem Speed

034-755

034-756

034-757

034-758 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly. See

"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 35. Or, lower

Modem Speed

034-759 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Lower

Modem Speed

034-760

034-761 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly. See

"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 35.

034-762 Press the

(Set)

button to clear the message. Try the following:

•Lower

Modem Speed

•Enable

ECM

Status code What you can do

Understanding Printer Messages

253

034-763 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Lower

Modem Speed

034-764

034-765

034-766

034-767 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Check if the phone line is connected properly. See

"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 35.

034-768 Press the

(Set) button to clear the message. Lower

Modem Speed

062-321 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

062-360

062-790 Press the

(Set) button. The scanned data is deleted. Retry scanning the document.

075-100 Check and clear the paper path, load the specified paper, and then press the

(Set) button. See "Clearing

Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer" on page 282.

075-921 Load paper for the second side (odd) pages, and press the

(Set) button. See "Loading Print Media When

Manual Duplex Printing" on page 174.

077-100 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer" on

page 282.

077-101

077-102

077-104

077-105

077-300 Close the rear cover.

077-900 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray" on

page 284.

077-901 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer" on

page 282.

091-313 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

091-402 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

092-310 Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor" on page 268.

093-423 Replace the specified toner cartridge soon. Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.

See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 262.093-424

093-425

093-426

093-919 Re-install or replace the specified toner cartridge. See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 262.

093-920

093-921

093-922

093-930 Remove the specified toner cartridge and install a new one. If you do not replace the toner cartridge, print

quality problems may occur. Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.

See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 262.

093-931

093-932

093-933

Status code What you can do

254

Understanding Printer Messages

093-960 Replace the specified toner cartridge with the supported one. Order a new consumable from

www.dell.com/supplies.

See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 262.

093-961

093-962

093-963

093-970 Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on page 264.

093-971

093-972

093-973

116-703 PDL emulation error has occurred. Press the

(Set) button to clear the message and cancel the current

print job.

116-720

117-331 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

117-332

117-333

117-334

117-343

117-346

117-348

117-350 Open the rear cover and close to continue. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting

Dell" on page 310.

117-366 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on

page 310.

124-333

134-211

191-310

193-700 This message indicates the printer is in the non-Dell toner mode.

Status code What you can do

Specifications

255

Specifications

Operating System Compatibility

Your Dell™ Color Multifunction Printer | E525w is compatible with Microsoft

Windows Vista

, Windows Vista

64-bit Edition, Windows

7, Windows

7 64-bit Edition, Windows

8, Windows

8 64-bit Edition, Windows

8.1,

Windows

8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server

2003, Windows Server

2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server

2008,

Windows Server

2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server

2008 R2, Windows Server

2012, Windows Server

2012

R2, Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, OS X 10.10, Red Hat

Enterprise Linux

6.1 Desktop (x86),

SUSE

Linux Enterprise Desktop 11, and Ubuntu

12.04.

Power Supply

Dimensions

Height: 353 mm (13.90 inches) Width: 410 mm (16.14 inches) Depth: 398 mm (15.67 inches)

Weight (only the toner cartridges are included): 16.1 kg (35.49 lb)

Memory

Rated voltage 220-240 VAC 110-127 VAC

Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Current 5.0 A 7.0 A

Power consumption 30.0 W (Ready) 30.0 W (Ready)

10.0 W (Sleep) 10.0 W (Sleep)

2.8 W (Deep Sleep*) 2.0 W (Deep Sleep)

0 W (Offline) 0 W (Offline)

* This condition is equivalent to Network standby mode, the power consumption in this condition is that all wired network ports are

connected and all wireless network ports are activated.

Base memory 512 MB

256

Specifications

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and

Interface

MIB Compatibility

A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as

adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the network

(analyze performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell Color Multifunction Printer | E525w complies with standard

industry MIB specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and network

management software systems.

Environment

Operation

Print Quality Guarantee

Storage

PDL/Emulations PCL 6, PCL5e, PostScript 3 Compatible, XML Paper Specification (Host Based)

OSes Windows Vista

, Windows Vista

64-bit Edition, Windows

7, Windows

7 64-bit

Edition, Windows

8, Windows

8 64-bit Edition, Windows

8.1, Windows

8.1 64-

bit Edition, Windows Server

2003, Windows Server

2003 x64 Edition, Windows

Server

2008, Windows Server

2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server

2008 R2,

Windows Server

2012, Windows Server

2012 R2, Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, OS X

10.8, OS X 10.9, OS X 10.10, Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1 Desktop (x86), SUSE Linux

Enterprise Desktop 11, and Ubuntu

12.04.

Interfaces Standard local:

Standard network:

USB 2.0

10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet

IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Wireless)

Temperature

5-32°C

Relative humidity 15-85% RH (no condensation)

Temperat ure 15-28°C

Relative humidity 20-70% RH (no condensation)

Temperature range 0-35°C

Storage humidity range 15-80% RH (no condensation)

Specifications

257

Altitude

NOTE:

For more information on adjusting the altitude, see "Adjust Altitude" on page 95.

Cables

Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:

Print Specifications

Operating Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)

Storage 70.9275 Kpa

Connection type Connection specifications and symbols

1Ethernet 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX

2USB USB 2.0

3Wall Jack Connector

4Phone Connector

Item Description

Print resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Print speed Simplex: Color 18 ppm, Black & White 18 (A4/Letter)

Paper size A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive, Folio, Legal, Envelope #10, Monarch, DL, C5

258

Specifications

Copy Specifications

Scanner Specifications

Item Description

Copy resolution Document glass: 600 x 600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)

ADF: 600 x 300 dots/25.4mm (1 inch)

(Same for Color/Black&White)

Copy speed Color 18 cpm or more, Black&White 18 cpm or more (When using the document glass to

make sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)

Color 7 cpm or more, Black&White 17 cpm or more (When using the ADF to make

sequential copies of multiple documents.)

Paper size A4, A5, B5, Executive, Letter, Folio, Legal, Monarch, DL, C5, Envelope #10

Zoom rate Document glass: 25% - 400%

ADF: 25% - 400%

Multiple copies 1 - 99 pages

Copy mode (=Original Type) Text, Text & Photo, Photo

Scanning method Document glass: Document-fixed flatbed scanning method

ADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning method (one side scanning)

Item Description

Compatibility Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN), Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)

Scan resolution TWAIN: 75 x 75 to 4800 x 4800 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)

WIA: 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)

Resolutions other than the following are achieved by driver's resolution conversion:

200 x 200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)

300 x 300 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch) (Default)

600 x 600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)

1200 x 1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)

Color bit depth 24 bit (WIA, TWAIN)

Mono bit depth 1 bit for Line art and 8 bit for Grayscale

Effective scanning length Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches)

ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)

Effective scanning width 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

Scan speed (Text mode) Black&White:

600 dpi: 100.89 [mm/sec]

1200 dpi: 26.15 [mm/sec]

Color:

600 dpi: 33.6 [mm/sec]

1200 dpi: 8.7 [mm/sec]

Specifications

259

Facsimile Specifications

Item Description

Compatibility ITU-T Group 3

Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Private Branch Exchange (PBX)

Data coding Black&White: 1bit, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH encoding

Color: Not supported

Max modem speed 33.6 Kbps

Transmission speed Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text data

scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.

Scanning speed Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax resolution mode)

ADF: approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at

fine fax resolution mode)

Maximum document length Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches)

ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)

Paper size Letter, A4, Legal

Resolution Standard: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 3.85 lines/mm (98 lines/inch)

200 dpi x 100 dpi

Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch)

200 dpi x 200 dpi

Super Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm (391 lines/inch)

200 dpi x 400 dpi

Ultra Fine: 16 pels/mm (406 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm (391 lines/inch)

400 dpi x 400 dpi

User memory 2 MB

Halftone 256 levels

260

Maintaining Your Printer

25 Maintaining Your Printer.......................................................... 261

26 Clearing Jams............................................................................ 276

Maintaining Your Printer

261

Maintaining Your Printer

Periodically, your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality. If several people

are using the printer, you may want to designate a key operator to maintain your printer. Refer printing problems and

maintenance tasks to this key operator.

Determining the Status of Supplies

If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback

on remaining toner levels. Enter the printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use

the E-mail Alert feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies, enter your name or the name of

the key operator in the e-mail list box.

On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:

• Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the printer can only display

information about one item at a time.)

• Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge

Conserving Supplies

You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper.

Storing Print Media

To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do.

• To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature is

approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.

• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.

• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so

the edges do not buckle or curl.

• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Supply Setting Function

Toner cartridge Toner Saving Mode in the Graphics

tab of the printer driver

This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less

toner. When this feature is used, the image quality will be lower

than when it is not used.

Print media Multiple Up in the Layout tab of

the printer driver

The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet. The

available numbers that each printer driver can print one sheet of

paper are as follows:

• PCL/XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver: 2, 4, 8, or 16

pages

• PS printer driver: 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages

Combined with the duplex setting,

Multiple Up

allows you to

print up to 32 pages on one sheet of paper. (16 images on the front

and 16 on the back)

262

Maintaining Your Printer

Storing Consumables

Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:

• Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F).

• An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.

• Direct sunlight.

•Dusty places.

• A car for a long period of time.

• An environment where corrosive gases are present.

• An environment with salty air.

Replacing Toner Cartridges

WARNING:

Before replacing toner cartridges, read and follow the safety instructions in the

Important Information

Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more cartridges online at

http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" on page 310.

It is recommended that you use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for

problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.

WARNING:

Never throw used toner cartridges into fire. The residual toner could explode resulting in burns and injuries.

WARNING:

Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of toner.

Removing the Toner Cartridges

Turn off the printer.

Open the toner access cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

263

Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.

WARNING:

Always pull the cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner.

Pull the toner cartridge out.

264

Maintaining Your Printer

Installing a Toner Cartridge

Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color and shake it five to six times to distribute the toner evenly.

NOTE:

Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the handle before replacing it.

NOTE:

Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spillage of the toner.

Remove the tape from the toner cartridge.

Adjust the toner cartridge to the associated cartridge holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing near the center of

the label until the cartridge clicks.

Maintaining Your Printer

265

Close the toner access cover.

Turn o n the p rinte r.

Cleaning Inside the Printer

WARNING:

To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet

before performing maintenance.

Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the toner access cover.

266

Maintaining Your Printer

Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.

Pull the toner cartridge out.

Pull the other three cartridges out as well.

Pull the cleaning rod out.

Maintaining Your Printer

267

Insert the cleaning rod fully into the hole beside the arrow on the printer until its tip reaches the interior of the

printer as illustrated below, and then pull it out.

Repeat the same procedure for the other three holes.

Insert the cleaning rod back to its original location.

Replace the black cartridge by adjusting it to the associated cartridge holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing

near the center of the label until the cartridge clicks.

268

Maintaining Your Printer

Replace the other three cartridges as well.

Close the toner access cover.

Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor

Clean the CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the operator panel.

Ensure that the printer is turned off.

Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

269

Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean dry cotton swab.

Close the rear cover.

Turn o n the p rinte r.

Adjusting Color Registration

This section describes how to adjust the color registration when you first install the printer or after moving it to a

new location.

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

Performing Auto Adjust

Auto Adjust allows you to correct the color registration automatically.

Operator Panel

Press the

(Menu)

button.

Press the button until

System

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Admin Menu

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Maintenance

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Press the button until

Adjust ColorRegi

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Ensure that

Auto Adjust

is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

button.

270

Maintaining Your Printer

Ensure that

Are You Sure?

is displayed, press the button to select

Yes

, and then press the

(Set)

button.

Auto adjust is performed.

Tool Box

Click

Start



All Programs



Dell Printers



Dell Printer Hub

Dell Printer Hub opens.

Select

Dell Color MFP E525w

print driver at

My Printers

Click on the link

Tool Box

from list at the left side of the page.

NOTE:

The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this

case, click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name.

The

Tool Box

opens.

Click the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Select

Registration Adjustment

from the list at the left side of the page.

The registration adjustment page is displayed.

Clear the

check box for

Auto Registration Adjustment

Click

Start

next to

Auto Correct

The color registration is corrected automatically.

Printing the Color Registration Chart

Tool Box

Click

Start



All Programs



Dell Printers



Dell Printer Hub

Dell Printer Hub opens.

Select

Dell Color MFP E525w

print driver at

My Printers

Click on the link

Tool Box

from list at the left side of the page.

NOTE:

The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this

case, click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name.

The

Tool Box

opens.

Click the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Select

Registration Adjustment

from the list at the left side of the page.

The registration adjustment page is displayed.

Clear the

check box for

Auto Registration Adjustment

Click

Start

next to

Color Regi Chart

The color registration chart is printed.

Determining Values

On the color registration chart printed, find the straightest lines where the two black lines and the colored line are

most closely aligned for each color (Y, M, and C).

If you find the straightest line, make a note of the value (-5 - +5) indicated by the straightest line for each color.

When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color registration.

Maintaining Your Printer

271

When the value is not 0, enter the value according to the procedure in "Entering Values" on page 271.

Entering Values

Tool Box

Using the Tool Box , enter the values that you found in the color registration chart to make adjustments.

Click

Start



All Programs



Dell Printers



Dell Printer Hub

Dell Printer Hub opens.

Select

Dell Color MFP E525w

print driver at

My Printers

Click on the link

Tool Box

from list at the left side of the page.

NOTE:

The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this

case, click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name.

The

Tool Box

opens.

Click the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Select

Registration Adjustment

from the list at the left side of the page.

The registration adjustment page is displayed.

272

Maintaining Your Printer

Clear the

check box for

Auto Registration Adjustment

Select the value with the straight line, and then click

Apply New Settings

Click

Start

next to

Print Color Regi Chart

The color registration chart is printed with the new values.

Adjust the values for every color until the lines at 0 are the straightest. If a line is not the straightest at 0, determine

the value and adjust the printer again.

CAUTION:

After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until the printer motor has stopped running.

Cleaning the Scanner

Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start

of each day and during the day, as needed.

Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

Open the document cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

273

Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until it is clean and dry.

Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until they are clean and dry.

1White Sheet

2White Document Cover

3Document Glass

4ADF Glass

274

Maintaining Your Printer

Close the document cover.

Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller

Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the ADF feed roller

at regular intervals.

Open the ADF cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

275

Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until it is clean.

If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the ADF may also be soiled. In this case, slightly

dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the contamination

from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.

276

Clearing Jams

Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid most jams. See "Print Media

Guidelines" on page 162 for more information.

NOTE:

Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.

Avoiding Jams

• Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" on page 162 for more information.

• See "Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray" on page 168 to load print media properly.

• Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the stack print media height does not exceed the maximum

height indicated by the line with an arrow on the width guides.

• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.

• Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try feeding one sheet at a

time through the standard 150 sheet tray.

• Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself.

• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.

• Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you load the print media.

• Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more information, see "Storing Print Media" on

page 166.

• Do not remove the standard 150 sheet tray during a print job.

• Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.

• Overtightening the width guides and the length guide may cause jams.

Clearing Jams

277

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams

WARNING:

Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage the printer.

The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.

1Scanner Unit

2Fusing Unit

3Levers

4Rear Cover

5ADF Cover

6Standard 150 Sheet Tray

123

6 5

278

Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF

When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), remove jams in the

following procedure.

WARNING:

Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the

Important

Information

WARNING:

To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet

before performing maintenance.

WARNING:

To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during

use.

NOTE:

To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

Open the ADF cover.

Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of the arrow shown in the following

illustration.

Clearing Jams

279

If you find it difficult to pull the document, open the document feeder tray.

Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.

Close the document feeder tray.

280

Clearing Jams

Close the ADF cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.

NOTE:

Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a legal-size document.

If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output tray or cannot find any jammed

document there, open the document output tray.

Clearing Jams

281

Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by carefully pulling the document in the direction

of the arrow shown in the following illustration.

282

Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer

WARNING:

Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the

Important

Information

NOTE:

To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

Lift up the cover above the standard 150 sheet tray, and remove any paper jammed from the front of the printer.

Release the cover above the standard 150 sheet tray.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer

WARNING:

Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the

Important

Information

WARNING:

To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet

before performing maintenance.

WARNING:

To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during

use.

NOTE:

To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

Clearing Jams

283

Lift up the levers.

Remove any jammed paper from the back of the printer.

Lower the levers to their original position.

284

Clearing Jams

Close the rear cover.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray

WARNING:

Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the

Important

Information

WARNING:

To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet

before performing maintenance.

WARNING:

To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during

use.

NOTE:

To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

Clearing Jams

285

Lift up the levers.

Remove any jammed paper from the back of the printer. If no paper is found in the paper path, face the front of

the printer and check the output tray.

Lift and open the scanner unit.

286

Clearing Jams

Remove any jammed paper from the output tray.

Lower and close the scanner unit.

Lower the levers to their original position.

Clearing Jams

287

Close the rear cover.

288

Troubleshooting

27 Troubleshooting......................................................................... 289

Troubleshooting

289

Troubleshooting

Basic Printer Problems

Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your printer, check each of the following:

• The power cable is connected to the printer, and to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

• The printer is turned on.

• The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.

• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.

If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn

on the printer. This often fixes the problem.

NOTE:

If error messages are displayed on the operator panel or on your computer screen, follow the on-screen instructions to

resolve the printer problems. For details about error messages and status codes, see "Understanding Printer Messages" on

page 248.

Display Problems

Printing Problems

NOTE:

A password is required to enter

Admin Menu

when

Panel Lock Set

is set to

Enable

. In this case, enter the

password you specified, and press the (Set) button.

Problem Action

Menu settings changed from the operator

panel have no effect.

Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities have

precedence over the settings made on the operator panel.

Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the

software program instead of the operator panel.

Problem Action

Job did not print or incorrect characters

printed.

Ensure that

Ready to Copy

appears on the operator panel before you send a

job to print.

Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer.

Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.

Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cable and that it is securely

connected to the printer.

Verify that the correct print media size is selected.

If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.

Check the interface of your printer from the

Admin Menu

Determine the host interface you are using. Print a panel settings page to verify

that the current interface settings are correct. Refer to "Printing a Report/List

Using the Operator Panel" on page 129 for details on how to print a panel settings

page.

290

Troubleshooting

Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds

occur.

Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer.

See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 166 for more information.

Fan the print media before loading it.

Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.

Ensure that the width guides and the length guide are adjusted correctly.

Do not overfill the print media sources.

Do not force print media into the standard 150 sheet tray when you load it.

Otherwise, it may skew or buckle.

Ensure that the print media is not curled.

Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are

using. See "Loading Print Media" on page 168 for more information.

Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding

improves.

Do not mix print media types.

Do not mix reams of print media.

Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print

media.

Load a print media source only when it is empty.

The envelope is creased after printing. Ensure that the envelope is loaded as instructed in "Loading Envelopes" on

page 171.

Page breaks in unexpected places. Increase the setting for Time-Out in the Printer Settings menu in the

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Print media does not stack neatly in the

output tray.

Turn the print media stack over in the standard 150 sheet tray.

Printer does not duplex pages. Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu on the

General or Paper/Output tab in the printer driver.

Problem Action

Troubleshooting

291

Print Quality Problems

NOTE:

In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,

see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 117 and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 75.

The Output Is Too Light

Action Yes No

1If you use non-Dell brand toner cartridges, install Dell brand toner

cartridges.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

2The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced.

Check if the LCD panel on the operator panel shows the message

prompting you to replace a toner cartridge.

Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3.

Verify that the print media is not damp and the correct print media is

used. See "Supported Paper Types" on page 167. If not, use the print

media recommended for the printer.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 4.

Verify that the

Paper Type

setting in the printer driver matches the print

media you loaded.

On the

General

Paper/Output

tab in

Printing Preferences

of the

printer driver, check the

Paper Type

setting.

Load dry (not damp) and corrected print media, and then click

Test Page

Printer properties

of the printer driver.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 5.

Disable the

Toner Saving Mode

in the printer driver.

On the

Graphics

tab in

Printing Preferences

of the printer driver,

ensure that the

Toner Saving Mode

check box is not selected.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

292

Troubleshooting

Toner Smears or Print Comes Off/Stain on Back Side

Action Yes No

1The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type

setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to

thick.

On the

General

Paper/Output

tab in

Printing Preferences

of the

printer driver, change the

Paper Type

setting.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper

Types" on page 167. If not, use the print media recommended for the

printer.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3.

Adjust the fusing unit temperature.

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Adjust Fusing Unit

on the

Printer

Maintenance

tab.

Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your

printing media.

Click

Apply New Settings

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Troubleshooting

293

Random Spots/Blurred Images

The Entire Output Is Blank

If this issue appears, contact Dell.

Streaks Appear on the Output

If this issue appears, contact Dell.

Action Yes No

1Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed correctly. See

"Installing a

Toner Cartridge" on page 264.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

If you use non-Dell brand toner cartridges, install Dell brand toner

cartridges.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3.

Clean up the fusing unit.

Load one sheet of paper in the standard 150 sheet tray, and then print

a solid image all over paper.

Load the printed sheet with the side to be printed on facing down,

and then print a blank sheet of paper.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

294

Troubleshooting

Pitched Color Dots

If this issue appears, contact Dell.

Vertical Blanks

Mottle

Action Yes No

1Clean inside the printer and performing test print.

Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod. See "Cleaning

Inside the Printer" on page 265.

Click

Print Test Page

Printer properties

of the printer driver.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

Adjust the transfer bias.

Launch the

Tool Box

, click

Adjust Transfer Roller

on the

Printer

Maintenance

tab.

Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

If you use non-recommended print media, use the print media

recommended for the printer.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Troubleshooting

295

Ghosting

Action Yes No

1Adjust the transfer bias.

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Registration Adjustment

on the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Click

Chart Print

Click

Ghost Configuration Chart

The ghost configuration chart is printed.

Click

Adjust Transfer Roller

Select the

Transfer Roller Refresh Mode

check box, and then click

Apply New Settings

Click

Registration Adjustment

on the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Click

Chart Print

Click

Ghost Configuration Chart

The ghost configuration chart is printed.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the

Paper Type

setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to

thick.

On the

General

Paper/Output

tab in

Printing Preferences

of the

printer driver, change the

Paper Type

setting.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3.

Adjust the fusing unit temperature.

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Adjust Fusing Unit

on the

Printer

Maintenance

tab.

Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your

printing media.

Click

Apply New Settings

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 4.

If you use non-recommended print media, use the print media

recommended for the printer.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

296

Troubleshooting

Fog

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)

Action Yes No

1Is the whole page printed light? Contact Dell. Go to action 2.

2Start Clean Developer.

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Clean

Developer

on the

Printer

Maintenance

tab.

Click

Start

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3.

Start

Toner Refr esh Mode

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Ton er Refr es h Mode

on the

Printer

Maintenance

tab.

Select the color that is the same as the fog.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 4.

Start

Toner Refr esh Mode

again.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of

the location.

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Environmental Sensor Info

on the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Click

Adjust Altitude

Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the printer

is installed.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Troubleshooting

297

Auger Mark

Wrinkled/Stained Paper

Action Yes No

1The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced.

Check if the LCD panel on the operator panel shows the message

prompting you to replace a toner cartridge.

Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

Start

Clean

Developer

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Clean

Developer

on the

Printer

Maintenance

tab.

Click

Start

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

Remove the stack of paper from the standard 150 sheet tray, rotate it

180 degrees, and then reload it in the tray.

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper

Sizes" on page 166 and "Print Media Guidelines" on page 162. If not, use

the print media recommended for the printer.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. If printing on an

envelope, go to action

If printing on print

media other than

envelopes, contact Dell.

298

Troubleshooting

The Top Margins Are Incorrect

Check the crease. Is the crease within 30 mm of the four edges of the

envelope?

This type of crease is

considered normal.

Yo u r p r i n t e r i s n o t a t

fault.

If the envelope is 220

mm or longer (C5 or

Envelope #10), go to

action 4a.

If the envelope is

shorter than 220 mm

(Monarch or DL), go to

action 4b.

4a Does the envelope have a flap on the long edge? The envelope is

Envelope #10.

Go to action 5b.

The envelope is C5.

Go to action 5a.

4b Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet

tray. For details, see "When Loading Envelope #10, DL, or Monarch" on

page 171.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 5b.

5a Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet

tray. For details, see "When Loading C5" on page 172.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

5b Use a different size envelope.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

1Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

Troubleshooting

299

Color Registration Is Out of Alignment

Action Yes No

1Execute auto color registration adjustment.

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Registration Adjustment

on the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Clear the

check box for

Auto Registration Adjustment

Click

Start

next to

Auto Correct

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

Clean the CTD sensor.

Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density

(CTD) Sensor" on page 268.

Launch the

Tool Box

, and click

Registration Adjustment

on the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Clear the

check box for

Auto Registration Adjustment

Click

Start

next to

Auto Correct

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3.

Print the color registration chart and manually correct the color

registration.

Click

Registration Adjustment

on the

Printer Maintenance

tab.

Clear the

check box for

Auto Registration Adjustment

Click

Start

next to

Print Color Regi Chart

The color registration chart is printed.

Select the value with the straight line. See "Adjusting Color

Registration" on page 269 for details.

Click

Apply New Settings

Click

Start

next to

Print Color Regi Chart

to print the color

registration chart again.

Adjust the values for every color until the lines at 0 are the straightest.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

300

Troubleshooting

Protrudent/Bumpy Paper

Jam

Misfeed Jam

Action Yes No

1Clean up the fusing unit.

Load one sheet of paper in the standard 150 sheet tray, and then print

a solid image all over paper.

Load the printed sheet with the side to be printed on facing down,

and then print a blank sheet of paper.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

1 Ensure that paper is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Proceed to the action

corresponding to the

type of the print media

being used:

•Thick - 2a

• Thin - 2b

• Envelope - 2c

If performing manual

duplex printing, go to

action 2d.

If using paper other

than the above or if not

performing duplex

printing, go to action

2e.

2a Use thick paper that is 163 g/m

or less.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3a.

2b Use thin paper that is 60 g/m

or more.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3a.

2c Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet

tray as instructed in "Loading Envelopes" on page 171.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3b.

Troubleshooting

301

Multi-feed Jam

A document jam occurs in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) if scanning of multiple-sheet document is

canceled while scanning is in progress.

2d Ensure that the print media is not curled.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3a.

2e Is the print media damp? Go to action 3c. Go to action 3a.

3a Fan the print media.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3c.

If you are performing

manual duplex printing

or if using an envelope,

contact Dell.

3b If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3a.

3c Turn over the print media.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 4.

4 Use print media that is not damp.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

1 Ensure that paper is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 2.

2 Is the print media damp? Go to action 3a. Go to action 3b.

3a Use print media that is not damp.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Go to action 3b.

3b Fan the print media.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

1 Clear the jam. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF" on page 278.

Is the problem recovered?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

302

Troubleshooting

Copy Problem

Fax Problems

Problem Action

A document loaded in the ADF cannot be

copied.

Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.

Vertical lines appear on the outputs when

you copy using the ADF.

Clean the ADF glass. See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 272.

Problem Action

The printer is not working, there is no

display and the buttons are not working.

Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.

Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.

No dial tone sounds. Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone

Line" on page 35.

Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone.

Faxes are not sent correctly to the numbers

stored in the memory.

Print an Address Book list and ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory

correctly.

The document does not feed into the

printer.

Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly.

Check that the document is of the right size, not too thick or thin.

Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.

Faxes are not received automatically. The

Fax

Telephone/Fax

Ans Machine/Fax

, or

DRPD

mode should

be selected.

Ensure that there is paper in the standard 150 sheet tray.

Check to see if the display shows

Memory Full

Check the

Junk Fax Setup

setting.

The printer does not send faxes.

Sending

should show up on the display.

Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.

The incoming fax has blank spaces or is

received in poor quality.

The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.

A noisy phone line can cause line errors.

Check your printer by making a copy.

The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge. For details, see

"Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 262.

Some of the words on an incoming fax are

stretched.

The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam.

Vertical lines appear on the documents when

you send using the ADF.

Clean the ADF glass. See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 272.

The printer dials a number, but the

connection with another fax machine fails.

The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming

calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the

problem.

Troubleshooting

303

Scanning Problems

Documents are not stored in the memory. There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the display shows a

Memory Full

message, delete any documents you no longer need from the

memory and then restore the document, or wait for the job in progress (e.g., a fax

transmission or reception) to complete.

Blank areas appear at the bottom of each

page or on other pages, with a small strip of

text at the top.

You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. See

"Print Media Guidelines" on page 162.

The printer will not send or receive faxes. Ensure that the country code is set correctly under (Menu) 

System



Admin Menu



Fax Settings



Country

Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone

Line" on page 35.

An error often occurs during a fax

transmission or reception.

Reduce the modem speed under (Menu) 

System



Admin Menu



Fax Settings



Modem Speed

Problem Action

The scanner does not work. Ensure that you place the document to be scanned face down from the document

glass, or face up in the ADF.

There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to

scan. Try the preview function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution

rate.

Check that the Ethernet or USB cable is connected properly.

Ensure that the Ethernet or USB cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a

known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.

Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the application you want to

use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.

The printer scans very slowly. Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to E-mail or Scan

to Network Folder feature.

Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of

memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image.

Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low

resolution.

Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur

in the ADF.

Ensure that the document’s paper type meets the specifications for the printer. See

"Supported Paper Types" on page 167 for more information.

Check whether the document is properly loaded in the ADF.

Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly.

Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity

of the ADF.

Ensure that the document is not curled.

Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF.

Vertical lines appear on the output when

scanned using the ADF.

Clean the ADF glass.

See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 272.

Problem Action

304

Troubleshooting

A smear appears at the same location on the

output when scanned using the document

glass.

Clean the document glass.

See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 272.

Images are skewed. Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the ADF or on the document glass.

Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned

using the ADF.

If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from the document glass.

The printer does not properly transfer scan

data to a specified destination via the Scan

to E-mail or Scan to Network Folder feature.

Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Scan to Network Folder

Check the following settings under Address Book  Server Address:

• Server Address

•Share Name

•Server Path

•Login Name

• Login Password

Scan to E-mail

Check the following setting under Address Book  Fax/E-mail:

• E-mail Address

Cannot scan using Windows Image

Acquisition (WIA) on a Microsoft

Windows Server

2003 computer.

Enable WIA on the computer.

To enable WIA:

Click

Start

, point to

Administrative Tools

, and then click

Services

Right-click

Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)

, and then click

Start

Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a

Windows Server

2008 or Windows Server

2008 R2 computer.

Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.

To install Desktop Experience:

Click

Start

, point to

Administrative Tools

, and then click

Server Manager

Under

Features Summary

, click

Add Features

Select the

Desktop Experience

check box, click

, and then click

Install

Restart the computer.

Problem Action

Troubleshooting

305

Digital Certificate Problems

Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a

Windows Server

2012 or Windows Server

2012 R2 computer.

Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.

To install Desktop Experience:

Click

Server Manager

from the

Start

screen.

The

Server Manager

screen appears.

Under

Manage

, click

Add Roles and Features

Add Roles and Features Wizard

appears.

Click

to skip the

Before you begin

page.

Ensure that

Role-based or feature-based installation

is selected, and then click

Ensure that

Select a server from the server pool

is selected, select the server under

Server Pool

, and then click

Click

to skip the

Select server roles

page.

Select the

Desktop Experience

check box under

User Interfaces and

Infrastructure

, and then click

Click

Confirmation

from the list on the left.

Select the

Restart the destination server automatically if required

check box, and

then click

Install

Restart the computer.

Problem Action

The

Certificate Signing Request (CSR)

Upload Signed Certificate

is not displayed.

Create a self-signed certificate and enable

SSL/TLS Server Communication

. For

details, see "Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication" on page 244.

The certificate cannot be imported. Confirm validity period of the certificate as well as the time setting of the printer.

Confirm whether the password is correct.

Confirm whether the file type is PKCS#7/#12 or x509CACert (extension:

p7b/p12/pfx/cer/crt).

Confirm whether the attribute information (key usage/extended key usage) of the

certificate to be imported is set correctly.

Use Internet Explorer.

Although a certificate was imported, it is not

displayed.

To import a certificate for use with the device (own device), import the secret key

and a certificate of the PKCS#12 (p12/pfx) format as a pair.

Server validation is not operating correctly. Although importing a root certificate (Trusted) to use for server authentication, an

intermediate certificate may be required when validating the path.

When executing a certificate file with the certification authority, create the

certificate with a format including all paths and then import that certificate.

Problem Action

306

Troubleshooting

Wi-Fi Direct Problems

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems

Wireless Problems

Problem Action

The device cannot discover the printer. The printer may be connected to another device via Wi-Fi Direct. Disconnect the

printer and the device. See "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network" on page 183.

The printer cannot disconnect from the

device even when the procedure in

"Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network" has

been performed.

The device may be automatically reconnecting to the printer. Reset the passphrase

for Wi-Fi Direct and disconnect the device. See "Resetting the Passphrase" on

page 184.

The network mode of the printer cannot be

set to

Ad-hoc

Ensure that

Wi-Fi Direct

is set to

Disable

Wi-Fi Direct

cannot be set to

Enable

Ensure that the network mode is set to

Infrastructure

Problem Action

Unable to retrieve the Address Book data

from the printer on the Address Book

Editor.

Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the

Ethernet or USB cable.

Ensure that the printer’s power is on.

Ensure that the printer driver is installed on your computer.

(The Address Book Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the printer driver.)

The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the

printer.

Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the

Ethernet or USB cable.

Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on, reboot it by turning the power

switch off and then on again.

If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,

and then try scanning again.

Problem Action

Cannot setup wireless connection. Ensure that the Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.

Ensure that

Wi-Fi

is set to

. See "Wi-Fi" on page 142.

Try disabling the firewall on your computer. The firewall on your computer may be

blocking communication with your printer.

Cannot setup wireless connection with WPS

(Wi-Fi Protected Setup

Ensure that the security setting of the wireless LAN access point or router is WPA

or WPA2. (WEP is not supported on WPS.)

Cannot setup wireless connection with the

WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push

Button Configuration).

Press the WPS button on the wireless LAN access point or router within 2 minutes

after starting the WPS operation on the printer. For details about the wireless LAN

access point or router, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access

point or router.

Cannot setup wireless connection with

WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal

Identification Number).

Check if the PIN you have entered on the computer is correct.

Troubleshooting

307

Dell E525w Color Multifunction Printer User's Guide User Manual To The 9b3796f0 7c62 41d3 Bd1a 480178a8555a

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation